Download 2013 Hyundai Tucson Owner’s Manual PDF

Download 2013 Hyundai Tucson Owner’s Manual PDF
OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific
vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD).
The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD models are
opposite of those written in this manual.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established
by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
F2
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
✽ NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
F3
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai
specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-4 in the
Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2013 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
F4
table of contents
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety system of your vehicle
3
Features of your vehicle
4
Driving your vehicle
5
What to do in an emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Index
I
Introduction
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-2
Vehicle handling instructions / 1-6
Vehicle break-in process / 1-6
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-7
1
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
1 2
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
You’ll find various WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTICES in this manual.
These were prepared to enhance your
personal safety. You should carefully read
and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance, we
recommend you to use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON
(Research Octane Number) 95 /AKI (Anti
Knock Index) 91 or higher.
You may use unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI 87~90
but it may result in slight performance
reduction of the vehicle.
Except Europe
Your new vehicle is designed to use only
unleaded fuel having an Octane Rating
of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 /
AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.
Introduction
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control system’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline. When
you are going to use leaded gasoline,
ask to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
whether leaded gasoline in your vehicle
is available or not.
Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems
may not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs drivability.
1 3
Introduction
Use of MTBE
We recommend that fuels containing
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over
15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%
weight) should not be used in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasoline that meets Europe
Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents.
For customers who do not use good
quality gasoline including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 15,000km (for Europe)/5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are available
from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use
them.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.
1 4
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel that
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,
heating oils, or non-approved fuel additives, as this will increase wear and
cause damage to the engine and fuel
system. The use of non-approved fuels
and / or fuel additives will result in a limitation of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in
your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel
are available, use summer or winter fuel
properly according to the following temperature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel
fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very carefully : If the engine stops through fuel failure, the circuits must be completely
purged to permit restarting.
Introduction
CAUTION
Do not let any gasoline or water
enter the tank. This would make it
necessary to drain it out and to
bleed the lines to avoid jamming the
injection pump and damaging the
engine.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7% made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel with biodiesel
will cause increased wear or damage to
the engine and fuel system. Repair or
replacement of worn or damaged components due to the use of non approved
fuels will not be covered by the manufactures warranty.
Biodiesel (for New Zealand)
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7%, made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), vegetable oil methyl
ester (VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding 7% with biodiesel will cause
increased wear or damage to the engine
and fuel system. Repair or replacement
of worn or damaged components due to
the use of non approved fuels will not be
covered by the manufactures warranty.
CAUTION
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recommended or approved by the vehicle manufacturer.
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recommended or approved by the vehicle manufacturer.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
As with other vehicles of this type, failure
to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher
ground clearance, track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of gravity than
other types of vehicles. In other words
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel
drive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. Again, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the “Reducing
the risk of a rollover” driving guidelines, in section 5 of this manual.
1 6
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000
km (1,200 miles) of operation.
Introduction
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Door ajar warning light
ABS warning light
Low fuel level warning light
Tailgate open warning light
Air bag warning light
Electric power steering (EPS)
system warning light*
Seat belt warning light
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
Shift pattern indicator*
Low beam indicator*
Engine oil pressure warning
light
High beam indicator
4WD system warning light*
Glow indicator (Diesel only)
Front fog light indicator*
4WD LOCK indicator*
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel only)
Rear fog light indicator*
Charging system warning light
DBC indicator*
Light on indicator*
Malfunction indicator*
KEY
OUT Key out warning*
Turn signal indicator
Immobilizer indicator*
*: if equipped
❈: For more detailed explanations, refer
to section 4, “Instrument cluster”.
ESP indicator*
Cruise indicator*
ESP OFF indicator*
Cruise SET indicator*
120
km/h
Overspeed warning light*
1 7
Your vehicle at a glance
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-4
Engine compartment / 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
Left-Hand drive type
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................4-14
2. Power window switches*........................4-19
3. Central door lock switch* ......................4-14
4. Power window lock switch* ....................4-22
5. Outside rearview mirror control
switch*....................................................4-41
6. Outside rearview mirror folding
button*....................................................4-42
7. Fuel filler lid release lever ......................4-26
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch* ......................................4-44
9. 4WD Lock button* ..................................5-24
10. DBC button* ........................................5-41
11. ESP OFF button* ................................5-36
12. Fuse box ..............................................7-53
13. Steering wheel ....................................4-33
14. Steering wheel tilt control* ..................4-35
15. Seat........................................................3-2
16. Hood release lever ..............................4-24
17. Parking brake pedal ............................5-31
18. Brake pedal..........................................5-30
19. Accelerator pedal
* : if equipped
* The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
2 2
OLM019001L
Your vehicle at a glance
Right-Hand drive type
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................4-14
2. Power window switches*........................4-19
3. Central door lock switch* ......................4-14
4. Power window lock switch* ....................4-22
5. Outside rearview mirror control
switch*....................................................4-41
6. Outside rearview mirror folding
button*....................................................4-42
7. Fuel filler lid release lever ......................4-26
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch* ......................................4-44
9. 4WD Lock button* ..................................5-24
10. DBC button* ........................................5-41
11. ESP OFF button* ................................5-36
12. Fuse box ..............................................7-53
13. Steering wheel ....................................4-33
14. Seat........................................................3-2
15. Parking brake pedal ............................5-31
16. Brake pedal..........................................5-30
17. Accelerator pedal
18. Hood release lever ..............................4-24
* : if equipped
* The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OLM019001R
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Left-Hand drive type
1. Light control/Turn signals ................4-66
2. Steering wheel audio controls* ....4-113
3. Bluetooth phone controls* ............4-136
4. Instrument cluster ..........................4-43
5. Horn ................................................4-35
6. Driver’s front air bag........................3-46
7. Wiper/Washer..................................4-72
8. Auto cruise controls* ......................5-45
9. Engine start/stop button* ..................5-8
10. Ignition switch ................................5-5
11. Digital clock and Audio ....4-107, 4-112
12. Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF indicator* ........................3-63
13. Hazard warning flasher switch......4-65
14. Climate control system* ................4-81
15. Seat warmer* ................................3-10
16. Cigarette lighter* ........................4-104
17. AUX, USB and iPod port* ..........4-107
18. Power outlet* ..............................4-106
19. Shift lever ............................5-14, 5-17
20. Passenger’s front air bag* ............3-46
21. Glove box ....................................4-102
* : if equipped
* The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OLM019002L
2 4
Your vehicle at a glance
Right-Hand drive type
1. Light control/Turn signals ................4-66
2. Steering wheel audio controls* ....4-113
3. Bluetooth phone controls* ............4-136
4. Instrument cluster ..........................4-43
5. Horn ................................................4-35
6. Driver’s front air bag........................3-46
7. Wiper/Washer..................................4-72
8. Auto cruise controls* ......................5-45
9. Engine start/stop button* ..................5-8
10.Digital clock and Audio ....4-107, 4-112
11. Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF indicator* ........................3-63
12. Hazard warning flasher switch......4-65
13. Climate control system* ................4-81
14. Seat warmer* ................................3-10
15. AUX, USB and iPod port* ..........4-107
16. Shift lever ............................5-14, 5-17
17. Passenger’s front air bag* ............3-46
18. Glove box ....................................4-102
* : if equipped
* The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OLM019002R
2 5
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline
1. Engine coolant reservoir..................7-25
2. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-24
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir.............7-28
4. Air cleaner .......................................7-32
5. Fuse box ..........................................7-52
6. Negative battery terminal ................7-39
7. Positive battery terminal ..................7-39
8. Radiator cap ....................................7-27
9. Engine oil dipstick............................7-24
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir..7-30
11. Power steering fluid reservoir* ......7-29
* : if equipped
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLM079001L
2 6
Your vehicle at a glance
■ Diesel
1. Engine coolant reservoir ..................7-25
2. Fuse box ..........................................7-52
3. Fuel filter ..........................................7-31
4. Engine oil dipstick ............................7-24
5. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-24
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir ............7-28
7. Air cleaner ........................................7-32
8. Negative battery terminal ................7-39
9. Positive battery terminal ..................7-39
10. Radiator cap ..................................7-27
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ..7-30
12. Power steering fluid reservoir* ......7-29
* : if equipped
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLM079002L
2 7
Seat / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-17
Child restraint system / 3-32
Airbag-supplemental restraint system / 3-43
Safety system of your vehicle
3
Safety system of your vehicle
SEAT
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest
Power seat*
Rear seat
(7) Seatback folding
(8) Headrest
(9) Armrest
(10) Seat warmer*
Manual seat
* if equipped
OLM039001
3 2
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING - Driver responsibility for front seat passenger
Riding in a vehicle with a front seatback reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
front seat is reclined during an
accident, the occupant’s hips may
slide under the lap portion of the
seat belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the front
passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. It is recommended that your chest is at least
250 mm (10 inches) away from
the steering wheel.
3 3
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passengers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks while the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly while riding.
(Continued)
3 4
(Continued)
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and backwards.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or backward without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.
WARNING
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
Safety system of your vehicle
OLM039002
Front seat
Manual adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
OLM039003
OLM039004
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Seat cushion height
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push down
the lever several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull up the
lever several times.
3 5
Safety system of your vehicle
Automatic adjustment (if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by using
the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving,
adjust the seat to the proper position so
as to easily control the steering wheel,
pedals and switches on the instrument
panel.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the vehicle.
3 6
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is completed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control switches at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
OLM039006
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.
Safety system of your vehicle
OLM039007
OLM039008
OLM039009
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seatback to the desired
angle. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
Pull the control switch up to raise or
down to lower the seat cushion. Release
the switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the button.
3 7
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
OLM039303N
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps protect the head and neck in
the event of a collision.
3 8
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest position of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
HNF2041-1
Active headrest (if equipped)
The active headrest is designed to move
forward and upward during a rear impact.
This helps prevent the driver's and front
passenger’s heads from moving backward and thus helps minimize neck
injuries.
WARNING
A gap between the seat and the
headrest release button may
appear when seating on the seat or
when you push or pull the seat. Be
careful not to get your finger, etc.
caught in the gap.
Safety system of your vehicle
OLM039010
OLM039011
OLM039012
Forward and backward adjustment
(if equipped)
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
3 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired detent. To
adjust the headrest to it’s furthest backwards position, pull it fully forward to the
farthest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.
3 9
Safety system of your vehicle
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
CAUTION
OLM039013
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
• The temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
→
OFF → HIGH (
3 10
) → LOW (
)
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could
occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time. In particular,
the driver must exercise extreme
care for the following types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or handicapped persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occupants.
*
OLM039015
* if equipped
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
Rear seat
OLM039304N
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with headrests in all the seating positions for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps protect the
head and neck in the event of a collision.
3 11
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed. Severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protection against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
OLM039017
OLM039018
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.
3 12
Safety system of your vehicle
CAUTION
OLM039019
OLM039020
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward from
the seatback.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
rear seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
3 13
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or handicapped persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
3 14
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase
the luggage capacity of the vehicle.
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects that could not be
accommodated in the cargo area.
Never allow passengers sit on top
of the folded down seatback while
the vehicle is moving. This is not a
proper seating position and no seat
belts are available for use. This
could result in serious injury or
death in case of an accident or sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seatbacks. This could allow
cargo to slide forward and cause
injury or damage during sudden
stops.
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the
pocket between the rear seatback and
cushion, and insert the rear seat belt
webbing in the guide to prevent the
seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest
position.
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
OLM039021
4. Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Pull the seatback
firmly until it clicks into place. Make
sure the seatback is locked in place.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger compartment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
CAUTION - Damaging rear
seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear seatback or
put luggage on the rear seat cushion, insert the buckle in the pocket
between the rear seatback and
cushion. Doing so can prevent the
buckle from being damaged by the
rear seatback or luggage.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position. Routing the
seat belt webbing through the rear
seat belt guides will help keep the
belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats.
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly. If the seatback
is returned without holding it, the
back of the seat could spring forward resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
3 15
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Special care of objects should be
taken when placing them in the rear
seats, since those may hit the front
seat occupants in a frontal collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
or the manual transaxle is in R
(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking
brake is securely applied whenever
loading or unloading cargo. Failure
to take these steps may allow the
vehicle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.
3 16
Safety system of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger
must
always
be
properly
restrained in the rear seat. Never
allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. If a child over 12
must be seated in the front seat,
he/she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is damaged, replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged. It is essential to replace
the entire assembly after it has
been worn in a severe impact even
if damage to the assembly is not
obvious. Belts should not be worn
with straps twisted. Each belt
assembly must only be used by one
occupant; it is dangerous to put a
belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
3 17
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
3 18
1GQA2083
Seat belt warning
■ Type A
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt
warning light blinks again for approximately 6 seconds.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON or
if it is unfastened after the ignition switch
is ON, the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 6 seconds. At
this time, if the seat belt is fastened, the
chime will stop at once. (if equipped)
■ Type B
As a reminder to the driver, the driver’s
seat belt warning lights will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON or
if it is disconnected after the ignition
switch is turned ON, the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 9 km/h, the illuminated warning light will start to blink until you
drive under 6 km/h.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 20 km/h (12 mph) the
seat belt warning chime will sound for
approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.
Safety system of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Front seat
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
1
2
B180A01NF
OLM039026
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety.
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is
too near your neck, you will not be getting
the most effective protection. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it
lies across your chest and midway over
your shoulder nearest the door and not
your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
3 19
Safety system of your vehicle
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appropriate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to personal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
3 20
B200A01NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
1
B210A01NF
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
Safety system of your vehicle
1KMB3441
OLM039056L
1KMB3443
3 Point rear center belt (if equipped)
To fasten the rear center belt
1. Extract the tongue plate from the hole
on the belt assembly cover and slowly
pull the tongue plates out from the
retractor.
2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
open end of the buckle (C) until an
audible “click" is heard, indicating the
latch is locked. Make sure the belt is
not twisted.
3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the
tongue plate (B) into the open end of
the buckle (D) until an audible “click” is
heard, indicating the latch is locked.
Make sure the belt is not twisted.
CAUTION - Cargo
Be sure that the cargo is securely
loaded in the rear cargo area. Doing
not so may damage the rear center
safety belt in sudden stop or certain
collisions.
CAUTION
When using the rear center seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
3 21
Safety system of your vehicle
There will be an audible “click” when the
tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips,
if you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let you
move around. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position. It
will also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
WARNING
When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all tongue
plates and buckles. If any tongue
plate or buckle is not locked, it will
increase the chance of injury in the
event of collision.
3 22
1KMB3451
OLM039057L
To unfasten the rear center belt
1. Press the release button on the buckle
(D) and remove the tongue plate (B)
from the buckle (D).
2. To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the buckle into the web release
hole (C). Pull up on the seat belt web
(A) and allow the webbing to retract
automatically.
Safety system of your vehicle
Too high
Shorten
Correct
1KMB3453
B220A04NF
B220B01NF
3. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the hole
on the belt assembly cover.
Lap belt (if equipped)
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insert
the metal tab into the locking buckle.
There will be an audible "click" when the
tab locks into the buckle. Check to make
sure the belt is properly locked and that
the belt is not twisted.
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the
length must be adjusted manually so it
fits snugly around your body. Fasten the
belt and pull on the loose end to tighten.
The belt should be placed as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist. If
the belt is too high, it could increase the
possibility of injury in an accident.
3 23
Safety system of your vehicle
OLM039028
OHD036120
OLM039029L
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
To release the seat belt:
When you want to release the seat belt,
press the button (1) in the locking buckle.
Stowing the rear seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed
in the pocket between the rear seatback
and cushion when not in use.
WARNING
The center lap belt latching mechanism is different from those for the
rear seat shoulder belts. When fastening the rear seat shoulder belts
or the center lap belt, make sure
they are inserted into the correct
buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
3 24
Safety system of your vehicle
OED030300
OLM039031
• Routing the seat belt webbing through
the rear seat belt guides will help keep
the belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten the
belt webbing by pulling it up.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt, use it
after taking it out of the guides.
If you pull the seat belt when it is
stored in the guides, it may damage
the guides and/or belt webbing.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt. (if equipped)
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
3 25
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
8KMB3311
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
3 26
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn correctly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehicle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly.
✽ NOTICE
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.
• Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pretensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the "ON" position, and
then it should turn off.
Safety system of your vehicle
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition key
is turned to "ON", or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, please have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS
air bag system as soon as possible.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3 27
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occupant seat contained in this manual.
3 28
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and children. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
✽ NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
Safety system of your vehicle
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check belt fit
periodically. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
afforded the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained by
a proper restraint system in the rear seat.
If a larger child (over age 12) must be
seated in the front seat, the child should
be securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
3 29
Safety system of your vehicle
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
3 30
Care of seat belts
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. The protection of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work properly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.
Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a collision or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury. If the webbing or
buckles are damaged, get them
replaced immediately.
Safety system of your vehicle
Periodic inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be
inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts
should be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3 31
Safety system of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards of
your country. Child restraint systems are
designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor
and/or ISOFIX anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
3 32
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in case of a sudden stop
or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
WARNING
To reduce the chance or serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the instructions for
installation and use of the child
restraint maker.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the windows, or lock themselves or others inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and reposition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always properly position and secure children
in rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floorboard of
a moving vehicle. During a collision or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicles interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not provide adequate security in an accident.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fastening them over a child.
• After an accident, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat belt,
tether anchor and lower anchor.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear right seat.
Rearward-facing child restraint system
CRS09
Forward-facing child restraint system
OUN026150
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. For safety reasons, we recommend that the child
restraint system be used in the rear
seats.
3 33
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
3 34
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the vehicle and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, have
the system checked immediately
by your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instructions provided with the child
restraint system could increase
the chance and/or severity of
injury in an accident.
1GHA2260
Installing a child restraint system
with a lap belt (on the center rear
seat) (if equipped) - Except Europe
To install a child restraint system on the
center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on the
center rear seat.
2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the
lap belt.
3. Route the lap belt through the restraint
according to the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap
belt for a snug hold on the child
restraint by pulling on the loose end of
the belt. After installation of the child
restraint system, try to move it in all
directions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed.
Safety system of your vehicle
E2MS103005
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
OEN036101
OEN036104
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installation of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.
WARNING
When using the rear center seat
belt, you should also refer to “3
point rear center seat belt” in this
chapter.
3 35
Safety system of your vehicle
Child Seat Restraint Suitability For Seat Position using the Seat Belt
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
Age Group
Seating Position
Front passenger
Rear outboard
Rear center
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
U*
U
U
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
U*
U
U
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
U*
U
U
OLM039033
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
U*
U
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system (if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the back of the rear seats.
U : Suitable for "universal" category
restraints approved for use in this
mass group
U* : Suitable for "universal" category
restraints approved for use in this
mass group (Seat position : foremost, Seat back : upright)
3 36
U
WARNING
We recommend that a child
restraint seat be installed in the
rear seat, even if the front passenger's air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position. To ensure the
safety of your child, the front passenger’s air bag must be deactivated when it should be necessary to
install a child restraint seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional
circumstances.
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
OLM039034
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
3 37
Safety system of your vehicle
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
OLM039035
OLM039036N
OLM039053N
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat may only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific or universal approval
in accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R 44.
There are ISOFIX symbols located on
the lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These symbols indicate the
position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
Both rear outboard seats are equipped
with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well
as a corresponding top tether anchorage
on the back side of the back rest. The
ISOFIX anchorages are located between
seat cushion and back rest, marked with
the ISOFIX icon.
For installation, CRS ISOFIX connecters
have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX
anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check
potential visual indicators on the CRS
and cross-check by pulling).
CRS with universal approval to ECE-R
44 need to be fixed additionally with a top
tether strap connected to the corresponding top tether anchorage point in the
back rest.
3 38
Safety system of your vehicle
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback reclined two positions
from the most upright latched position.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
lower anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the lower anchors.
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during installation.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previous page.)
3 39
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the center of the rear seat
using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach a
child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
ISOFIX attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the child
restraint seat properly in the center of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child restraint
lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may
cause the anchorage points or
tether anchor to break, causing
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
3 40
(Continued)
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child
restraint.
Safety system of your vehicle
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe
vehicle ISOFIX positions
Mass Group
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Size Class
F
G
E
E
D
C
D
C
B
B1
A
Fixture
Front Passenger
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Center
-
X
X
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
X
X
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
-
ISO/L1
ISO/L2
ISO/R1
ISO/R1
ISO/R2
ISO/R3
ISO/R2
ISO/R3
ISO/F2
ISO/F2X
ISO/F3
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal
category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given
in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific
vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in
this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost
position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height
650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape
Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
3 41
Safety system of your vehicle
Recommended child restraint systems – For Europe
Mass Group
Name
Manufacturer
Group 0-1
FAIR G0/1 S
FAIR S.r.l
Baby Safe Plus
Britax Römer
FAIR G0/1 S
FAIR S.r.l
(0-18kg)
Group 1
(9-18kg)
Duo Plus
Britax Römer
Britax Römer
CRS Manufacturer information
FAIR S.r.l
http://www.fairbimbofix.com
Britax Römer
http://www.britax.com
3 42
Type of Fixation
rearward facing with vehicle
specific ISOFIX platform type “D”
with vehicle 3-point safety seatbelt
forward facing with vehicle
specific ISOFIX platform type “A”
vehicle ISOFIX lower anchorage
+ Top Tether
with vehicle 3-point safety seatbelt
ECE-R44
Approval No.
E4 04443718
E1 04301146
E4 04443718
E1 04301133
E1 04301133
Safety system of your vehicle
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Driver’s front air bag*
(2) Passenger’s front air bag*
(3) Side impact air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) Front passenger’s air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and
severity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLM032301L/OYN039026
3 43
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following components:
1. Driver's front air bag module*
2. Front impact sensors*
3. Passenger's front air bag module*
4. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*
5. Side impact sensors*
6. Curtain air bag modules*
7. Side air bag modules*
8. SRS control module (SRSCM)
9. Air bag warning light
10. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch*
11. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator*
*: if equipped
3 44
The SRSCM continually monitors all elements while the ignition switch is ON to
determine if a frontal, near-frontal impact
or side impact is severe enough to
require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.
Driver’s front air bag (1)
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
air bag warning light should go out.
B240B01L
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
The front air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering wheel
and in the front passenger's panel above
the glove box. When the SRSCM detects
a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Safety system of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (2)
Driver’s front air bag (3)
Passenger’s front air bag
B240B02L
B240B03L
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other controls.
B240B05L
WARNING
• Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.
3 45
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or
continuously remains on after
illuminating for about 6 seconds
when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position, or after the
engine is started, comes on while
driving, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.
Driver’s front air bag
OLM039037
Passenger’s front air bag
OLM039038
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions.
3 46
Safety system of your vehicle
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover on the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
in the front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with
considerable force and in the blink
of an eye. Seat belts help keep
occupants in proper position to
obtain maximum benefit from the
air bag. Even with air bags, improperly and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air bag
inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maximum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side impact air bags
can injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passengers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
(Continued)
3 47
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated while the
vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
(Continued)
3 48
(Continued)
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rearimpact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
OEL039054
OLM039052L
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air bag can be
deactivated by the passenger’s front air
bag ON/OFF switch if a child restraint is
installed on the front passenger's seat or
if the front passenger's seat is unoccupied by a person.
To ensure the safety of your child, the
passenger’s front air bag must be deactivated when it should be necessary to
install a rearward facing child seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional circumstances.
To deactivate or reactivate the passenger’s front air bag:
To deactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the OFF position. The passenger’s front air bag OFF indicator ( )
will illuminate and stay on until the passenger’s front air bag is reactivated.
To reactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the master key into the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the ON position. The passenger’s front air bag OFF indicator will
go out and the passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator ( ) will illuminate for
approximately 60 seconds.
3 49
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
On some models, the front air bag
ON/OFF switch could turn by using
a similar small rigid device. Always
check the status of the front air bag
ON/OFF switch and passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF indicator.
✽ NOTICE
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position,
the passenger’s front air bag is activated
and child or infant seat should not be
installed on the front passenger seat.
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position, the passenger’s front air bag is
deactivated.
3 50
CAUTION
• If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is not working
properly, the air bag warning light
( )on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
And, the passenger's front air bag
OFF indicator ( ) will not illuminate (The passenger's front air
bag ON indicator comes on and
goes off after approximately 60
seconds), the SRS Control
Module reactivate the passenger’s front air bag and the passenger’s front air bag will inflate
in frontal impact crashes even if
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF
position.
If this occurs, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch, the pre-tensioner seat belt
system and the SRS air bag system as soon as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the SRS air bag warning light
blinks or does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch, pre-tensioner seat belt
and the SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the
proper position of the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch.
• Deactivate the passenger's front
air bag only when the ignition
switch is switched off, or the malfunction may occur in the SRS
Control Module.
And there may be a danger that
the driver's and/or front passenger’s and/or side and curtain air
bag may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly during a collision.
• Never install a rearward facing
child seat on the front passenger's seat unless the passenger's
front air bag has been deactivated. The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch, do
not install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat.
A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
Children who are too large for
child restraint systems should
always occupy the rear seat and
use the available lap/shoulder
belts. Children are afforded the
most safety in the event of an
accident
when
they
are
restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat.
• As soon as the child seat is no
longer needed on the front passenger's seat, reactivate the front
passenger's air bag.
OLM039039L
OLM032310L
Side impact air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
3 51
Safety system of your vehicle
• The side impact air bags are designed
to deploy only during certain sideimpact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and point
of impact.
• The side impact air bags do not only
deploy on the side of the impact but
also on the opposite side.
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
3 52
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is supplemental to the driver's and the
passenger's seat belt systems
and is not a substitute for them.
Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times while the vehicle
is in motion. The air bags deploy
only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause
significant injury to the vehicle
occupants.
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition key is
on.
• If the seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Inform that your
vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags.
Safety system of your vehicle
• The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and point of impact.
• The curtain air bags do not only deploy
on the side of the impact but also on
the opposite side.
• The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact.
OXM039055
OLM032311L
WARNING
• In order for side impact and curtain air bags to provide the best
protection, both front seat occupants and both outboard rear
occupants should sit in an
upright position with the seat
belts
properly
fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system.
Make sure to put the child
restraint system as far away from
the door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint system
in a locked position.
(Continued)
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.
3 53
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above mentioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occupants in an accident.
3 54
Safety system of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
1
2
3
OLM039040/OLM039041/OLM039042/OLM039044
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
3 55
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air bag
or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
3 56
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B pillar and
C pillars where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect
your vehicles collision and air
bag deployment performance.
1VQA2084
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
Safety system of your vehicle
OVQ036018N
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side air bags (side
impact and/or curtain air bags) are
designed to inflate only in side impact
collisions, but they may inflate in other
collisions if the side impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
1VQA2086
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
OLM032312L
Side impact and curtain air bags
(if equipped)
Side impact and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
3 57
Safety system of your vehicle
OUN036087
OVQ036018N
1VQA2089
• Air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear collisions, because occupants are
moved backward by the force of the
impact. In this case, inflated air bags
would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
• However, if equipped with side impact
and curtain air bags, the air bags may
inflate depending on the intensity, vehicle speed and angles of impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
3 58
Safety system of your vehicle
1VQA2090
1VQA2091
1VQA2092
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be significantly replaced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment
would not provide protection to the
occupants.
However, side and/or curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over by a side impact collision, if the
vehicle is equipped with side impact air
bags and curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
3 59
Safety system of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side impact air bag or
curtain air bag) in order to help protect
the occupants from serious physical
injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. Though, factors are not limited to those mentioned above.
3 60
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to get the air
bag between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant
impacts those structures. This speed of
inflation reduces the risk of serious or
life-threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of
air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which normally can
include facial abrasions, bruises and
broken bones, and sometimes more
severe injuries because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible (at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passenger
should always move their seat as
far back as possible and sit back
in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of a collision, and passengers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
a proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest to both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. We strongly urge
you to open your doors and/or windows as soon as possible after impact
in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the
smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are nontoxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with the cold water
immediately and consult the doctor if the
symptom persists.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in steering wheel
and/or instrument panel and/or in
both sides of the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are very
hot. To prevent injury, do not touch
the air bag storage areas internal
components immediately after an
air bag has inflated.
3 61
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
1JBH3051
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
If your vehicle is equipped with the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch,
you can activate or deactivate the front
passenger’s air bag when necessary.
For more details, please refer to 3-49
page.
3 62
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it
would cause serious or fatal
injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
W7-147
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light in
your instrument panel is to alert you of a
potential problem with your air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
Safety system of your vehicle
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
OEL039061
OEL039052
Passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator (if equipped)
Passenger’s front air bag
OFF indicator (if equipped)
The passenger's front air bag ON indicator illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
The passenger's front air bag ON indicator also comes on when the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
ON position and goes off after approximately 60 seconds.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indicator also comes on when the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position and goes off when
the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the ON position.
3 63
Safety system of your vehicle
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the
passenger’s front air bag OFF indicator will not illuminate (The passenger's front air bag ON indicator
comes on and goes off after
approximately 60 seconds) and the
passenger’s front air bag will inflate
in a frontal impact even if the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the OFF position.
If this occurs, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch and the SRS air bag system
as soon as possible.
3 64
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel must be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they must
be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to accidental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed.
An
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk
of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between themselves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side impact air bag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the air
bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring harnesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
3 65
Safety system of your vehicle
Note that these government warnings
focus on the risk to children, we also
wants you to be aware of the risks which
adults are exposed to. Those have been
described in previous pages.
■ Type A
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on
the floor.
OLM039050
■ Type B
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
OLM039050L
Air bag warning label
(if equipped)
Air bag warning labels are attached to
alert driver and passengers of potential
risk of air bag system.
3 66
Keys / 4-2
Remote keyless entry / 4-5
Smart key / 4-8
Theft-alarm system / 4-11
Door locks / 4-13
Tailgate / 4-17
Windows / 4-19
Hood / 4-24
Fuel filler lid / 4-26
Panorama Sunroof / 4-29
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel / 4-33
Mirrors / 4-36
Instrument cluster / 4-43
Rear parking assist system / 4-62
Rearview camera / 4-65
Hazard warning flasher / 4-65
Lighting / 4-66
Wipers and washers / 4-72
Interior light / 4-76
Defroster / 4-79
Manual climate control system / 4-81
Automatic climate control system / 4-90
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-98
Storage compartment / 4-102
Interior features / 4-104
Audio system / 4-111
4
Features of your vehicle
KEYS
Record your key number
■ Type A
■ Type B
The key code number is
stamped on the bar
code tag attached to the
key set. Should you
lose your keys, this
number will enable an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate the keys
easily. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record the
code number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
OED036001A/OFD047002-A
■ Type C
■ Type D
OHG040001
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove box.
(if equipped)
OLM042001
Type C
To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
4 2
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may
damage the key.
Type D
To remove the mechanical key, press and
hold the release button and remove the
mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a click
sound is heard.
Immobilizer system (if equipped)
WARNING
Use only HYUNDAI original parts
for the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens,
the starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous even if the key is not in the
ignition. Children copy adults and
they could place the key in the ignition. The ignition key would enable
children to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
4 3
Features of your vehicle
To deactivate the immobilizer system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehicle.
4 4
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separately not to have any malfunction after you receive your new vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal from normally
transmitting.
✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobilizer
system malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction and should only
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button is
pressed. If all doors are closed, the hazard warning lights blink once to indicate
that all doors are locked. However, if any
door remains open, the hazard warning
lights will not blink. If all doors are closed
after the lock button is pressed, the hazard warning lights blink.
■ Type A (if equipped)
OHG040006
■ Type B (if equipped)
Unlock (2)
All doors are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that all doors are unlocked.
After depressing this button, the doors
will be locked automatically unless you
open any door within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlock (3) (if equipped)
The tailgate is unlocked if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.
However, after pressing this button, the
tailgate will lock automatically unless you
open the tailgate within 30 seconds.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.
Alarm (4) (if equipped)
The horn sounds and hazard warning
lights flash for about 30 seconds if this
button is pressed for more than 1 second. To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the transmitter (or the
smart key).
OLM049003
Remote keyless entry system
operations
4 5
Features of your vehicle
Transmitter precautions
✽ NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
4 6
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufacturer vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for reprogramming.
■ Type A
OLM042302
■ Type B
CAUTION
• The keyless entry system transmitter is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use your
transmitter or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
OLM049005
Battery replacement
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery
which will normally last for several years.
When replacement is necessary, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter center
cover.
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
4 7
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM049006
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door (and tailgate) and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a smart
key are similar to the remote keyless
entry. (Refer to the “Remote keyless
entry” in this section.)
4 8
OLM049007
Smart key functions
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors (and tailgate).
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
Locking
Pressing the button of the front outside
door handles with all doors (and tailgate)
closed and any door unlocked, locks all
the doors (and tailgate). The hazard
warning lights will blink once to indicate
that all doors (and tailgate) are locked.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.)
from the outside door handle. If you want
to make sure that a door has locked or
not, you should check the door lock button inside the vehicle or pull the outside
door handle.
Even though you press the button, the
doors will not lock and the chime sounds
3 times if any of the following occurs:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The engine start/stop button is in the
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the tailgate is opened.
Features of your vehicle
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the front outside
door handles with all doors (and tailgate)
closed and locked, unlocks all the doors
(and tailgate). The hazard warning lights
will blink twice to indicate that all doors
(and tailgate) are unlocked. The button
will only operate when the smart key is
within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside door handle.
When the smart key is recognized in the
area of 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the front
outside door handle, other people can
also open a door without possession of
the smart key.
Tailgate unlocking
If you are within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the
outside tailgate handle, with your smart
key in possession, the tailgate will unlock
and open when you press the tailgate
handle switch.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
“Starting the engine with a smart key” in
section 5.
Smart key precautions
✽ NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, and contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and key to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer to protect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any of
the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile twoway radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
properly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
4 9
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls,
text
messaging,
and/or
sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your cell phone
or smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
4 10
OLM042001
Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation
If the smart key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key.
1. Depress and hold the release button
(1) and remove the mechanical key (2).
2. Insert the key into hole of the outside
door handle. Turn the key toward the
rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward
the front of the vehicle to lock.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed stage
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch or turn off the engine.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)
and the engine hood are closed and
latched.
3. • Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the transmitter
(or smart key).
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, tailgate or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won’t operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After this, if all doors, tailgate and engine hood are closed, the
hazard warning lights blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handles with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door remains open, the hazard
warning lights won’t operate and
theft-alarm will not arm. Close the
door and try again to lock the doors.
If tailgate or engine hood remains
open, the hazard warning lights won’t
operate and theft-alarm will not arm.
Close the tailgate or engine hood.
The hazard warning lights blink once
and theft-alarm arms.
• Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle, the
alarm may be activated when the
remaining passenger(s) leave the
vehicle. If any door, trunk lid or
engine hood is opened within 30
seconds after entering the armed
stage, the system is disarmed to
prevent unnecessary alarm.
4 11
Features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage
Disarmed stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using ignition key (*) or transmitter (or
smart key).
• The tailgate is opened without using
ignition key (*) or transmitter (or smart
key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
27 seconds, unless the system is disarmed. To turn off the system, unlock the
doors with the ignition key (*) or transmitter.
(*) : To enable the ignition key to function,
consult your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. (Except Europe)
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started.
- The ignition switch is in the “ON” position for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door is
pressed while carrying the smart key.
- The engine is started.
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽ NOTICE - Non-immobilizer
system
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
(Continued)
4 12
(Continued)
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait for
30 seconds. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE - Immobilizer system
• If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch and start the engine.
Then the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and should only be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifications to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
✽ NOTICE
Unlock
Lock
OLM049008
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to
unlock and toward front of vehicle to
lock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a key,
all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically. (if equipped)
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key (or
smart key).
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
OLM049009
WARNING
• If you don't close the
securely, the door may
again.
• Be careful that someone's
and hands are not trapped
closing the door.
door
open
body
when
• To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) or central
door lock switch (2) to the “Lock” position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch, all vehicle doors will
lock automatically.
• Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.
4 13
Features of your vehicle
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s
(or front passenger’s) door is pulled
when the door lock button is in the lock
position, the button will unlock and the
door will open. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is opened.
• Doors cannot be locked if the smart
key is in the vehicle and any door is
opened.
Lock
Unlock
OLM049010
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
4 14
Driver’s door
OLM049011
With central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pushing down on the front portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• However, if the key is in the ignition
switch and any front door is open, the
doors will not lock even though the
front portion (1) of central door lock
switch is pressed.
• However, if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is open, the doors will
not lock even though the front portion
(1) of central door lock switch is
pressed.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discourage potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
And all doors will be automatically
unlocked when you turn the engine off or
when you remove the ignition key. (if
equipped)
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
4 15
Features of your vehicle
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle.
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (1) until rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
OLM049012
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the “Lock”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the “Lock (
)” position, rear door
will not open even though the inner
door handle is pulled inside the vehicle.
4 16
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To prevent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
TAILGATE
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
OLM049013
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter (or smart key)
or central door lock switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and pulling it
up.
• When all doors are lock if the tailgate
unlock button on the smart key is
pressed for more than 1 second, the
tailgate is unlocked. Once the tailgate
is opened and then closed, the tailgate
is locked automatically.
OLM049014
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attaching
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that
the tailgate is securely latched.
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the tailgate latch and striker while closing
the tailgate. It may damage the tailgate's latch.
4 17
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Exhaust
WARNING
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle which can
cause serious injury or death to
vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle.
OLM049015
Emergency tailgate safety release
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
4 18
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment, the tailgate can
be opened by pushing the release lever
and pushing open the tailgate.
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in the
vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally
locked in the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use with extreme
caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.
Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up*/down*
(7) Power window lock switch
*: if equipped
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
OLM049020
4 19
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door’s window. The driver has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of rear (or front)
passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within the 30
seconds period. The driver’s door has a
master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle
4 20
✽ NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
OLM049021
Window opening and closing
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).
Features of your vehicle
OLM049022
OLM049023
OUN026013
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up the switch momentarily
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
(Driver's window)
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or press down and
release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the driver’s window and continue pulling up the driver’s power window switch for at least 1 second after
the window is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
4 21
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
4 22
OLM049024
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power window
switches on the front and rear passengers' doors by pressing the power window lock switch to lock position
(pressed).
When the power window lock switch is
pressed, the driver's master control cannot operate the front and rear passengers' power windows.
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the ignition key in
the vehicle.
• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms outside the window while driving.
4 23
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
OLM049025
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting
the shift lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transaxle and to
the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for
manual transaxle, and setting the
parking brake.
4 24
OLM049026
OLM049027
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift
the hood (2).
3. Pull out the support rod.
4. Hold the hood opened with the support
rod.
WARNING - Hot parts
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The plastic will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is
hot.
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm
(1 ft.) above the closed position and let
it drop. Make sure that it locks into
place.
WARNING - Hood
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the
hood from falling and possibly
injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood raised. The view will be
blocked and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
4 25
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
OSA047022
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel-filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuelfiller lid opener.
✽ NOTICE
If the fuel-filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the lid to break the ice
and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid.
If necessary, spray around the lid with
an approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle
to a warm place and allow the ice to
melt.
4 26
OLM049028
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel
filler lid opener up.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap (2), turn the fuel
tank cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
WARNING - Refueling dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warning posted at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline ShutOff, if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.
• When
using
an
approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
4 27
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Use only portable plastic fuel
containers designed to carry and
store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
4 28
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
Features of your vehicle
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
Sunroof open warning chime
(if equipped)
OLM049030
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime
will sound for approximately 7 seconds.
However, if the smart key is in the smart
key holder, the warning chime will not
sound.
Close the sunroof securely when leaving
your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm be sure to wipe off any water
that is on the sunroof before operating
it.
CAUTION
• Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle.
If the sunroof is open, rain or
snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well
as cause theft.
4 29
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will slide all the
way open.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the
slide position but can be slid while in a
tilt position.
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or roller
blind while driving. This could
result in loss of control and an
accident that may cause death,
serious injury, or property damage.
• If you would like to carry items on
the roof rack using a cross bar,
do not operate the sunroof.
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, do not load heavy items
above the sunroof or glass roof.
• Do not allow children to operate
the sunroof.
4 30
OLM049031
Sliding the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
To open the sunroof, pull the sunroof
control lever backward.
To close the sunroof, push or pull the
sunroof control lever with the safety
switch (1) forward or downward.
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will automatically
close all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Never try pinching any part of
your body intentionally to activate the Automatic reversal function.
• The Automatic reversal function
may not work if something gets
caught just before the sunroof
fully closes.
OXM049029
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof before
closing it.
OLM049032
Tilting the sunroof
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward.
To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof
lever with the safety switch (1) downward
until the sunroof moves to the desired
position.
4 31
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
WARNING - Sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, you must reset
your sunroof system as follows:
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed by
a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof
while driving.
• Make sure your hands and head
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
OXM049031N
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be damaged.
• Do not leave the roller blind
closed while the sunroof is
opened.
Roller blind
The roller blinds are installed inside of
the sunroof and glass roof.
Open or close the roller blind manually
using the handle (1) when you need to.
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
CAUTION
Operation of the roller blind without
using the handle (1) may cause misalignment or malfunction.
✽ NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on the
blind because of its material characteristic.
4 32
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Open the roller blind.
3. Close the sunroof.
4. Release the sunroof control lever.
5. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close (about 10 seconds) until the sunroof is moved a little. Then, release the lever.
6. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sunroof operates as follows;
TILT OPEN → SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof system has been reset.
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Power steering (if equipped)
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power
steering system becomes inoperative,
the vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel to the
extreme right or left for more than 5
seconds with the engine running.
Holding the steering wheel for more
than 5 seconds in either position
may cause damage to the power
steering pump.
✽ NOTICE
• If the power steering drive belt breaks
or if the power steering pump malfunctions, the steering effort will
greatly increase.
• If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather (below
-10°C/14°F), the power steering may
require increased effort when the
engine is first started. This is caused
by increased fluid viscosity due to the
cold weather and does not indicate a
malfunction.
When this happens, increase the
engine RPM by depressing the accelerator until the RPM reaches 1,500
rpm then release or let the engine idle
for two or three minutes to warm up
the fluid.
Electric power steering
(if equipped)
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is controlled by the power steering control unit
which senses the steering wheel torque
and vehicle speed to command the
motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for better control of the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
4 33
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not illuminate.
• The steering effort is high immediately after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• If the EPS system does not operate
normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The
steering wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally. Take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
4 34
(Continued)
• When you operate the steering wheel
in low temperature, abnormal noise
could occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will disappear. This is a normal
condition.
Tilt steering
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You
can also raise it to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the vehicle
(if equipped).
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle and height
of steering wheel while driving.
You may lose your steering control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharppointed object.
OLM049033L
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and height (3, if equipped), then pull
up the lock-release lever to lock the
steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust
the steering wheel to the desired position
before driving.
OLM049034
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽ NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
4 35
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
Night
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out the
rear window.
Day
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident which could cause
death, serious injury or property
damage.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
4 36
OLM049035
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automatically controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Features of your vehicle
1. To operate Compass feature
Press and release the button, then the
vehicle's directional heading will be displayed. Pressing and releasing the button
again will turn off the display.
Rearview display
Indicator
Sensor
OLM049037L
To operate the electric rearview mirror
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
OLM049036L
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with
compass
1. Feature Control Button
2. Status Indicator LED
3. Rear Light Sensor
4. Display Window
Automatic dimming rear view mirror controls automatically the glare of headlights
of the vehicle behind you when it turned
on by pressing and holding the button for
more than 3 but less than 6 seconds. It is
turned off by pressing and holding the
button for same time once more.
Heading display
- E : East
- W : West
- S : South
- N : North
ex) NE : North East
2. Calibration procedure
Press and hold the button for more than
9 but less than 12 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C" will
appear in the display.
- Driving the vehicle in a circle at less
than 8km/h 2 times or until the compass
heading appears.
- Driving in a circle in right-handed direction and opposite direction are possible,
and if the calibration is completed, the
compass heading will appear.
- Keep driving in a circle until a compass
heading appears.
4 37
Features of your vehicle
Campasss Zone
OUN046101L
4 38
Features of your vehicle
3. Setting the compass zone
1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the zone map.
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 6 but less than 9 seconds. The
current zone number will appear in the
display.
3. Press the button until the new zone
number appears in the display. After
you stop pressing the button in, the
display will show a compass direction
within a few seconds.
4. Changing Mirror Angle setting
(if equipped):
Due to mirror positions being angled
towards the driver, the compass mirror
can also compensate for drivers seated
on the Left Hand side of the vehicle
(steering wheel on the LH side of the
vehicle) or Right Hand side of the vehicle
(steering wheel on the RH side of the
vehicle).
To adjust the Left Hand, “L” or Right
Hand, “R”, setting:
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 12 seconds.
2. Release then press the button to toggle between “L” and “R”.
✽ NOTICE
This procedure also causes the compass
to be de-calibrated.
3. To re-calibrate the compass, drive the
vehicle in 2 complete circles at less
than 8km/h (5mph).
CAUTION
1. Do not install the ski rack, antenna, etc. which are attached to the
vehicle by means of a magnet.
They affect the operation of the
compass.
2. If the compass deviates from the
correct indication soon after
repeated adjustment, have the
compass checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3. The compass may not indicate
the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a
steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct compass point when the
vehicle moves to an area where
the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
4. When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
4 39
Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both lefthand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
WARNING - Rearview mirrors
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. In some countries, the
left outside rearview mirror is
also convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing
lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
4 40
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OLM049039
OLM049042
Remote control
Electric type (if equipped)
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (1) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point on the mirror
adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neutral position to prevent the inadvertent
adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
4 41
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
OLM049041
Electric type (if equipped)
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
depress the button.
To unfold it, depress the button again.
CAUTION
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the engine is not running.
4 42
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
■ Type B
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
6. Turn signal indicators
7. Odometer/Trip computer (if equipped)
■ Type C
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
OLM049051K/OLM049051E/OLM049051D
4 43
Features of your vehicle
Gauges
■ Type A
Left-Hand drive type
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in miles
per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
OLM049052
Right-Hand drive type
OLM049054
■ Type B
OLM049054C
OLM049052R
■ Type C
Instrument panel illumination
(if equipped)
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumination
control button to adjust the instrument
panel illumination intensity.
The instrument cluster illumination intensity can be adjusted by pressing the control button with the headlight switch in
any position when the ignition switch is in
ON position.
4 44
OLM049054N
Features of your vehicle
Gasoline
Diesel
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OLM049056
OLM049057
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the ignition switch is in ACC or
ON position with the engine OFF. This
movement is normal and will not affect
the accuracy of the tachometer once the
engine is running.
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.
4 45
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
E level.
OLM049058
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in
section 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
4 46
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.
Features of your vehicle
Tripmeter
Distance to empty
Average fuel consumption*
Instant fuel consumption*
Average speed
OLM049059
OLM049060
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputercontrolled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
such as odometer, tripmeter, distance to
empty, average speed, average fuel consumption, instant fuel consumption and
elasped time on the display when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. All
stored driving information (except
odometer, distance to empty and instant
fuel consumption) is reset if the battery is
disconnected.
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
Elapsed time
* if equipped
4 47
Features of your vehicle
OLM049061
OLM049062
OLM049064L
Tripmeter (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the distance of individual trips selected since the last tripmeter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 km (0.0 to 999.9 miles).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter is being displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 50 km (30
miles), “---” will be displayed and the distance to empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
999 km (30 to 999 miles).
Average fuel consumption (if equipped)
(l/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average consumption reset. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 miles).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel consumption is being displayed, clears the average fuel consumption to zero (--.-).
4 48
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
OLM049065C
Instant fuel consumption (if equipped)
(l/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption during the last few seconds.
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupted, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty values may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
OLM049066
Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is
being displayed, clears the average
speed to zero (---).
4 49
Features of your vehicle
Warnings and indicators
OLM049067
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time traveled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(0:00).
4 50
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
Air bag warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
This light also comes on when the SRS
is not working properly. If the AIRBAG
warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Features of your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned to ON and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a problem with the
ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time while driving, your vehicle
may have a malfunction with ABS and
EBD system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warning light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS warning
light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease. In this
case, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If the both ABS and Brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehicle’s brake system will not work
normally. So you may experience
an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
4 51
Features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning and
chime (if equipped)
Low Beam Indicator Light
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
Seat belt warning light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink or illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
For details, refer to the seat belt on chapter 3.
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights are on.
The indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights are ON.
High beam indicator
Rear fog light indicator
(if equipped)
Turn signal indicator lights
The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consulted for repairs.
This indicator also blinks when the hazard warning switch is turned on.
4 52
This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light on indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the tail
lights or headlights are ON.
This indicator illuminates when the rear
fog lights are ON.
Features of your vehicle
Engine oil pressure warning
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driving:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunction.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer before
the car is driven again.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have it towed to any authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for a brake system
inspection and necessary repairs.
4 53
Features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear
for additional engine braking and stop the
car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired immediately by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
4 54
Shift pattern indicators
(if equipped)
Charging system warning
The indicator displays to show the automatic transaxle shift lever selection.
(P, R, N-D and sports mode)
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem
as soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
Door ajar warning light
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.
Without smart key system
This indicator illuminates when the
immobilizer key is inserted and turned to
the ON position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine. The
indicator goes out after the engine is running.
If this indicator blinks when the ignition
switch is in the ON position before starting the engine, have the system checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Tailgate open warning light
This warning light illuminates when the
tailgate is not closed securely with the
ignition switch in any position.
With smart key system
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immobilizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goes
off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC or ON position, the indicator
will illuminate for approximately 30
seconds to indicate that you are able to
start the engine. However, when the
smart key is not in the vehicle, if the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed, the indicator will blink for a
few seconds to indicate that you are
not be able to start the engine.
• If the indicator illuminates only for 2
seconds and goes out when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
turned to ON position with the smart
key in the vehicle, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• When the battery is weak, if the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed, the indicator will blink and you
are not able to start the engine.
However, you are able to start the
engine by inserting the smart key in
the smart key holder. Also, if the smart
key system related parts have a problem, the indicator will blink.
4 55
Features of your vehicle
Low fuel level warning
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
4 56
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential problem has been
detected somewhere in the emission
control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition key is turned to the ON position, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.
CAUTION
Prolonged
driving
with
the
Emission
Control
System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION - Gasoline engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power. Have
the Engine Control System inspected as soon as possible by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Diesel engine
(if equipped with DPF)
When the malfunction indicator
light is blinks, it may stop blinking
after driving the vehicle at more
than 60km/h (37 mph) or at more
than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000
engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light
continues to be blinked in spite of
the procedure, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
then check the DPF system.
If you continue to drive with the
malfunction indicator light blinking
for a long time, the DPF system can
be damaged and fuel consumption
can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,
some error related to the injection
quantity adjustment occurs which
could result in loss of engine
power, combustion noise and poor
emission. Have the Engine Control
System inspected as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) indicator
(if equipped)
The ESP indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 seconds. When the ESP is on, it monitors the
driving conditions. Under normal driving
conditions, the ESP indicator will remain
off. When a slippery or low traction condition is encountered, the ESP will operate, and the ESP indicator will blink to
indicate the ESP is operating.
But, if the ESP system malfunctions the
indicator illuminates and stays on. Take
your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
ESP OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The ESP OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESP OFF mode,
press the ESP OFF button. The ESP
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESP is deactivated.
4 57
Features of your vehicle
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
DBC (Downhill brake control) indicator (if equipped)
KEY OUT indicator
(if equipped)
The DBC indicator will illuminate when
the DBC button is pressed and the system is on.
When driving down a steep hill at a
speed under 35 km/h (22 mph), the DBC
will operate and the DBC indicator will
blink to indicate the DBC is operating.
When the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any door
is open, the system checks for the smart
key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle,
the indicator will blink, and if all doors are
closed, the chime will also sound for
about 5 seconds. The indicator will go off
while the vehicle is moving. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle or insert it in the
smart key holder.
CRUISE
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the cruise
control ON-OFF button on the steering
wheel is pushed.
The indicator goes off when the cruise
control ON-OFF button is pushed again.
For more information about the use of
cruise control, refer to “Cruise control
system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
SET
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control switch (-SET or RES+) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the
cruise control switch (-SET or RES+) is
pushed.
The cruise SET indicator does not illuminate when the cruise control switch
(CANCEL) is pushed or the system is
disengaged.
4 58
If the red indicator illuminates, the DBC
system may have malfunctioned. Take
your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
KEY
OUT
Features of your vehicle
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
is to prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
Glow indicator (Diesel
engine)
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel engine)
The indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is placed at the ON position. The engine can be started after the
preheat indicator light goes off. The illuminating time varies with the water temperature, air temperature and battery
condition.
This warning light illuminates for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is set to the
ON position and then it will go out. If it
lights up while the engine is running, it
indicates that water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter. If this happens,
remove the water from the fuel filter. For
more Information, refer to “Fuel filter” in
section 7.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine was not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position during 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
CAUTION
If the preheat indicator light continues to illuminate or flash on and off
after the engine has warmed up or
while driving, check the system by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
When the fuel filter warning light is
illuminated, engine power (vehicle
speed & idle speed) may decrease.
If you keep driving with the warning
light on, you can damage your vehicle's engine parts and injection system of the Common Rail. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
4 59
Features of your vehicle
Overspeed warning
(if equipped)
120
km/h
Overspeed warning light
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning light will
blink. This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
Overspeed warning chime
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning chime will
sound for about 5 seconds. This is to prevent you from driving your vehicle with
overspeed.
4WD system warning light
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the 4WD indicator will illuminate and then go off in a few seconds.
If the 4WD system warning light
illuminates, this indicates that there is a
malfunction in the 4WD system. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
4WD LOCK indicator
(if equipped)
The 4WD LOCK indicator light is illuminated when the 4WD LOCK button is
pushed. The purpose of this 4WD LOCK
mode is to increase the drive power
when driving on wet pavement, snowcovered roads and/or off-road. The 4WD
LOCK indicator light is turned off by
pushing the button again.
4 60
CAUTION
Do not use 4WD LOCK mode on dry
paved roads or highway, it can
cause noise, vibration or damage of
4WD related parts.
Features of your vehicle
Electric power steering
(EPS) system warning light
(if equipped)
EPS
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out.
This light also comes on when the EPS
has some troubles. If it comes on while
driving, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
4 61
Features of your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
Sensors
OLM049080
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47
in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limited. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
4 62
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed over
10 km/h (6 mph), the system may not
be activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47
in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31
in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently.
• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)
of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones
are within range of the sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign matter such as snow or water. (The sensing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) in height and narrower than 14
cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system precautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
4 63
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual inspection to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
4 64
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting the gear to the R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction in the rear parking assist system. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occupants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through the
rearview display mirror while backing-up.
OLM049081
■ Type A
Rear view display
Type B
The rearview camera may be turned off
by pressing the ON/OFF button when the
rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press the
ON/OFF button again when the ignition
switch is on and the shift lever in R
(Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on
automatically whenever the ignition
switch is turned off and on again.
WARNING
OLM049082
■ Type B
Rear view display
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check
the inside/outside rearview mirror
and the area behind the vehicle
before and while backing up
because there is a dead zone that
can't see through the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
OLM049084
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition
switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
OLM049083N
4 65
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, perform the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights) remain
on for approximately 20 minutes after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 30 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning off the
light switch from the headlight or Auto
light position.
4 66
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver’s door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlight escort function does not turn
off automatically. Therefore, it causes the battery to be discharged. In
this case, make sure to turn off the
lamp before getting out of the vehicle.
OXM049110
Headlight welcome function
(if equipped)
When the headlight switch is in the ON or
AUTO position and all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, if you press
the door unlock button on the transmitter
(or smart key), the headlights will come
on for about 15 seconds.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate at
night.
At this time, if you press the door unlock
button again or door lock button on the
transmitter (or smart key), the headlights
will turn off immediately.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
OAM049041
Parking light position (
)
When the light switch is in the parking
light position, the tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
OAM049042
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position the head, tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
✽ NOTICE
OLM049328
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
4 67
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the instrument panel, this will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work properly.
OAM049044
High - beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams. The high-beam indicator
will light when the headlight high beams
are switched on. To prevent the battery
from being discharged, do not leave the
lights on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.
4 68
OAM049043
Flashing headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
Features of your vehicle
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 times.
OAM049045
Turn signals and lane change signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is
operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, bulb may be burned out or have
a poor electrical connection in the circuit.
OAM049046
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn
on when the fog light switch (1) is turned
on after the parklight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light
switch (1) to the OFF position.
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
4 69
Features of your vehicle
The rear fog lights turn on when the rear
fog light switch is turned on after the front
fog light switch (if equipped) is turned on
and the headlight switch is in the parklight position.
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear
fog light switch to the on position again or
turn the headlight switch off or front fog
light switch off.
■ Type A
OLM049346L
■ Type B
OLM049346E
Rear fog light (if equipped)
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
headlight switch to the headlight on position and turn the rear fog light switch (1)
to the on position.
4 70
✽ NOTICE
To turn on the rear fog light switch, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position.
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system will make the headlights turn OFF when:
1. The parklight switch is ON.
2. Engine stops.
Features of your vehicle
Left-hand drive type
OLM049211L
Right-hand drive type
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam at
the proper leveling position, or headlights
may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
other than those listed below, adjust the
switch position so that the beam level
may be the nearest as the condition
obtained according to the list.
Loading condition
Driver only
Driver + Front passenger
OLM049211R
Switch position
0
0
Full passengers
(including driver)
1
Full passengers (including
driver) + Maximum permissible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permissible loading
3
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the passengers and the loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch.
4 71
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer
Rear window wiper/washer
/
AUTO*
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
OXM049231L/OAM049048N
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· ON – Continuous wipe
· INT – Intermittent wipe
(if equipped)
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
4 72
Features of your vehicle
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to OFF position when the wiper is not in use.
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, move
the lever to this position and
release it. The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is held in
this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the
same wiping intervals. Use this
mode in light rain or mist. To vary
the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽ NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
CAUTION
Rain sensor
OXM049123
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windshield wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use caution in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windshield glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windshield glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the windshield glass.
4 73
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the OFF position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the OFF
position. Otherwise, wipers may
operate and ice may damage the
windshield wiper blades. Always
remove all snow and ice and defrost
the windshield properly prior to
operating the windshield wipers.
4 74
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
OAM049102N
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windshield and obscure your
vision.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
OAM049103N
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to the desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
OXM049125
Push the lever away from you to spray
rear washer fluid and to run the rear
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper
operation will continue until you release
the lever. (if equipped)
4 75
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights (Map lamp, Room
lamp, Vanity mirror lamp) automatically
turn off after approximately 20 minutes
when the ignition switch is turned off and
all doors are closed.
If your vehicle is equipped with the theft
alarm system, the interior lights automatically turns off approximately 5 seconds
after the system is in the armed stage.
OLM049100K
Map lamp (if equipped)
Push the lens to turn the map lamp on or
off.
• ON
: The light (with room lamp)
stays on at all times.
• DOOR : The light (with room lamp)
comes on when any door
(except tailgate) is opened
regardless of the ignition switch
position. When doors (except
tailgate) are unlocked by the
transmitter (or smart key), the
light (with room lamp) comes
on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door
(except tailgate) is not opened.
4 76
Features of your vehicle
Also, the light (with room lamp)
goes out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door
(except tailgate) is closed.
However, if the ignition switch is
ON or all doors (except tailgate)
are locked, the light will turn off
immediately.
If a door (except tailgate) is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ACC or LOCK position, the
light (with room lamp) stays on for
about 20 minutes. However, if a
door (except tailgate) is opened
with the ignition switch in the ON
position, the light (with room
lamp) stays on continuously.
• OFF : The light (only map lamp) stays
off at all times.
❈ When the lamp is turned ON
by pressing the lens (1), the
lamp does not turn off even if
the switch (2) is in the OFF
position.
OLM049101
OLM049105
Room lamp
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Press the button to turn the light on or off.
•
: The lamp will turn on if this button is pressed.
•
: The lamp will turn off if this button is pressed.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
• Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or
damage the sunvisor.
• Turn off the lamp before return
the sunvisor to its original position.
4 77
Features of your vehicle
OLM049103
OLM049102
Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
The luggage room lamp comes on when
the trunk lid is opened.
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
The parking lights or headlights must be
ON for the glove box lamp to function.
4 78
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
■ Type A
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
✽ NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog on the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this section.
OLM049109
■ Type B
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
OLM049110
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
while engine is running.
4 79
Features of your vehicle
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the outside mirror defrosters, they will operate at
the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.
OLM049104
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
Without smart key
The engine must be running to enable
this feature. To activate the front wiper
deicer, press the front wiper deicer button. The indicator on the button illuminates when the deicer is ON.
The front wiper deicer automatically
turns off after 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the
deicer, press the front wiper deicer button again.
With smart key
If your vehicle is equipped with the wiper
deicer, it will operate at the same time
you turn on the rear window defroster.
4 80
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
■ Type B
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. MAX A/C selection button (if equipped)
4. Temperature control knob
5. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
6. Mode selection button
7. Air intake control button
OLM049111/OLM049111L
4 81
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system (if equipped)
on.
OLM049120
4 82
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)
OLM049112L
Mode selection
The mode selection buttons controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Face, BiLevel, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost
air position.
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (C, E, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
4 83
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
OLM049115
OLM049113
OLM049114
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster.
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
■ Type B
OLM049115L
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to
the right position for warm and hot air or
left position for cooler air.
4 84
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
■ Type A
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compartment will be drawn through
the heating system and
■ Type B
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
■ Type A
OLM049116
Outside (fresh) air position
■ Type A
With the outside (fresh) air
position
selected,
air
enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
■ Type B
function selected.
■ Type B
OLM049116L
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
press the control button.
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale. In addition,
prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the
passenger compartment.
WARNING
• Continue using the climate control
system in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate control
system in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driving.
4 85
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
OLM049117
■ Type B
OLM043117A
■ Type B
OLM049118
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
OLM049117L
OLM043117L
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to the
“0” position turns off the fan.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the “0” position.
4 86
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
or
position.
to the
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position (press the MAX A/C position selection button (if equipped)) then
set the fan speed control to the highest
speed.
4 87
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
4 88
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Evaporator
core
Heater core
1LDA5047
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate is suddenly
decreased, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
It is important when servicing the air
conditioning system that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation
may occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
4 89
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
■ Type B
1. AUTO (automatic control) button
2. Driver's temperature control knob
3. A/C display
4. Passenger's temperature control knob
5. Dual temperature control selection button
6. OFF button
7. Front windshield defroster button
8. Air conditioning button*
9. Fan speed control switch
10. Air intake control button
11. Mode selection button
OLM049121L/OLM049121R
4 90
Features of your vehicle
OLM049122L
OLM042222L
Automatic heating and air conditioning
2. Set the desired temperature by turning
the temperature control knob.
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by setting the temperature.
✽ NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
• Mode selection button
• Air conditioning button
• Front windshield defroster button
• Air intake control button
• Fan speed control button
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 23°C/73°F.
OLM049154
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
4 91
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air conditioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pressing buttons
or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO
button. In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons or knob(s) selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.
4 92
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level
OLM049123
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual climate control system”.
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
OLM049125L
OLM049124L
OLM049114
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
■ Type B
OLM049125R
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the
right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the
left extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature
will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.
4 93
Features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deactivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control switch. The driver and passenger side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.
OLM049126
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Also, if the passenger side
temperature control switch is operated, it will automatically change to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control to adjust the driver side temperature. Operate the passenger side
temperature control to adjust the passenger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo) temperature setting, the DUAL mode is deactivated for maximum heating or cooling.
4 94
Temperature conversion (if equipped)
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows:
While pressing the OFF button, press the
AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.
The display will change from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Centigrade.
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compartment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
OLM049127L
Outside thermometer
The current outside temperature is displayed in 1°C (1°F) increments. The temperature range is between -40°C ~ 60°C
(-40°F ~ 140°F).
• The outside temperature on the display
may not change immediately like a
general thermometer to prevent the
driver from being inattentive.
OLM049128L
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside
and is heated or cooled
according to the function
selected.
4 95
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
4 96
WARNING
• Continue using the climate control
system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate control
system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control to
the outside (fresh) air position as
much as possible while driving.
OLM049129L
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by operating the fan speed control
switch.
To change the fan speed, press ( X)
the switch for higher speed, or push
(W ) the switch for lower speed. To turn
the fan speed control off, press the front
blower OFF button.
Features of your vehicle
OLM049130L
OLM049131
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the front blower OFF button to turn
off the front air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the mode
and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON position.
4 97
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of
the outside air and the windshield
could cause the outer surface of
the windshield to fog up, causing
loss of visibility. In this case, set
the mode selection to the
position and fan speed control to the
lower speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windshield.
■ Type A
OLM049132
■ Type B
OLM049132L
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
2. Select desired temperature.
4 98
Features of your vehicle
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. If the
position is
selected, air conditioning (if equipped)
will also be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning (if equipped) and/or
outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning (if equipped) will be selected
automatically.
■ Type A
OLM049133
■ Type B
OLM049133L
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the
position.
4 99
Features of your vehicle
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
or air conditioning (if equipped) are controlled automatically according to certain
conditions such as
or
position.
To cancel or return to the defogging logic,
do the following.
OLM049134
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the
position is selected,
lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher
fan speed.
4 100
OLM049135
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
Features of your vehicle
3. Press the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake control
button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second
of interval. It indicates that the defogging
logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.
■ Type A
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
OLM049136
■ Type B
OLM049136L
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the
defrost position (
).
OLM049137
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select the defroster position pressing
the defroster button (
).
3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control
button (Recirculated air button) at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5
second of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
4 101
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover can not close
securely.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
OLM049151
Center console storage
(if equipped)
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
To open the center console storage pull
up the lever.
OLM049152
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a key. (if equipped)
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
4 102
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
OLM049142
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglasses holder while the vehicle is moving.
The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open
sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder to prevent
breakage or deformation of
glasses. It may cause personal
injury if you try to open it forcibly
when the glasses are jammed in
holder.
4 103
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after it
is already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
CAUTION
OLM049144
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to the
"ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in. This can damage the heating element
and create a fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI
replacement or its approved equivalent.
4 104
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, for
example) may damage the socket or
cause electrical failure.
OLM049145
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a
fire.
Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
■ Front
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you burn yourself.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncovered or unsecured bottles, glasses, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
OLM049146
■ Rear (if equipped)
OLM049207
Sunvisor
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
OLM049147
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or
backward (3). (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
Push the switch to turn the light on or off.
(if equipped)
•
: The light turns on.
• O : The light turns off.
The ticket holder (5) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
4 105
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
■ Front
CAUTION
lamp (if equipped)
• Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or
damage the sunvisor.
• Always use the sunvisor extension, after swing the sunvisor to
the side.
OLM049150
■ Rear (if equipped)
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
OLM049153
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
4 106
• Use power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using
the accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the engine
off could cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
Features of your vehicle
Setup the clock
With audio off
1. Press the [SETUP] button until the
clock of the display blinks.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)
and press it.
OLM049208
Digital clock (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driving. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
With audio on
1. Press the [SETUP] button.
2. Select the [CLOCK] mode by turning
the knob(1) and press it.
3. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)
and press it.
OLM049195
Aux, USB and iPod
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod
port, you can use an aux port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to plug in
an USB and also an iPod port to plug in
an iPod.
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.
4 107
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
OXM049228
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
4 108
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
HYUNDAI recommends that only
the HYUNDAI floor mat designed
for use in your vehicle be
installed.
OLM049202L
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the four holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net.
If necessary, contact your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer to obtain a luggage net.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT overstretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use the luggage net when the strap
has visible signs of wear or damage.
OLM049203
Cargo security screen
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to hide
items stored in the cargo area.
OLM049204
To use the cargo security screen, pull the
handle backward and insert the edges
into the slots.
4 109
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
OLM049205
When not in use, place the cargo security screen on the lower portion of the
cargo area. (if equipped)
• Do not place objects on the cargo
security screen. Such objects
may be thrown about inside the
vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident
or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehicle and locate the weight as far
forward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed, do
not put the luggage on it when it is
used.
4 110
Features of your vehicle
EXTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precautions to make sure the cargo does
not damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof length
or width.
OLM049206
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
be sure not to position cargo onto the
roof rack in such a way that it could
interfere with sunroof operation.
WARNING
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible onto the roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
ROOF
RACK
100 kg (220 lbs.)
EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may damage your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds
that may result in loss of vehicle
control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn corners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. Severe
wind updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof rack.
This is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off
the roof rack and cause damage
to your vehicle or others around
you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving to
make sure the items on the roof
rack are securely fastened.
4 111
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
OHM048154
Antenna
Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This
antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
4 112
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove surely the antenna by
rotating it counterclockwise. If
not, the antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper reception. But it could be folded or
removed when parking the vehicle or when loading cargo on the
roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
Features of your vehicle
VOL (+ / -) (1)
• Press the up button (+) to increase volume.
• Press the down button (-) to decease
volume.
SEEK (
/
) (2)
If the SEEK button is pressed for 0.8 second or more, it will work as follows in
each mode.
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driving.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
OLM049194
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in
each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
MODE (3)
Press the button to select Radio or CD
(compact disc).
MUTE (4)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to activate the sound.
4 113
Features of your vehicle
FM reception
AM (MW, LW) reception
JBM001
How car audio works
AM (MW, LW) and FM radio signals are
broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted
by the radio antenna on your car. This
signal is then received by the radio and
sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
4 114
FM radio station
JBM002
JBM003
AM (MW, LW) broadcasts can be
received at greater distances than FM
broadcasts. This is because AM (MW,
LW) radio waves are transmitted at low
frequencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature of
the earth rather than travelling straight
out into the atmosphere. In addition, they
curve around obstructions so that they
can provide better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
CAUTION
JBM004
JBM005
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade. When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
When using a communication system such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Don't use a cellular phone when
you are driving. You must stop at a
safe place to use a cellular phone.
4 115
Features of your vehicle
Care of disc (if equipped)
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventilation before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA/
AAC/WAVE files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure on undesirable matter other
than CDs are inserted into the CD
player (Do not insert more than one
CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
4 116
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CDRW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your car
audio system.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy-Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player does not perform correctly
the CDs maybe defective, not the CD
player.
Features of your vehicle
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (GENERAL)
1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control
Knob
2. FM Selection Button
3. AM Selection Button
4. Automatic Channel Selection Button
5. Preset Button
6. AST (AUTO STORE Button)
7. SETUP Button
8. Manual Channel Selector & Sound
Quality Control Knob
9. DISP (DARK) Button
❋There will be no
logo if the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature is not supported.
4 117
Features of your vehicle
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (EUROPE_RDS)
1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control
Knob
2. FM Selection Button
3. AM Selection Button
4. Automatic Channel Selection Button
5. Preset Button
6. AST (AUTO STORE Button)
7. SETUP Button
8. Manual Channel Selector & Sound
Quality Control Knob
9. DISP (DARK) Button
10. TA Selection Button
11. PTY (FOLDER) Button
❋There will be no
4 118
logo if the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
1. Power ON/OFF Button &
Volume Control Button
Turns on/off the set when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button
is turned to the right, it increases the volume and left,decreases the volume.
• Press this button to turn the audio system ON or OFF. (EUROPE MODEL
ONLY)
• Depending on the model if the ignition
switch is not on ACC or ON position.
the “Battery Discharge” warning
appears on LCD after 10 seconds of
power-up, and automatically turns off
after 1 hours of operation.
• Adjusts the volume of the car audio
system. Rotate clockwise to increase
the volume or counterclockwise to
decrease.
2. FM Selection Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1and
FM2 when the button is pressed each
time.
❈ May change in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟
FMA in some models.
3. AM Selection Button
6. AST (AUTO STORE Button)
Pressing the [AM] button selects the AM
band. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.
❈ May change in order of AM ➟ AMA in
some models.
When the button is pressed, it automatically selects and saves channels with
high reception rate to PRESET buttons
[1]~[6] and plays the channel saved in
PRESET1. If no channel is saved after
AST, it will play the previous channel.
• Saves only to the Preset memory
(1)~(6) of FMA or AMA mode in some
models.
4. Automatic Channel Selection
Button
• When the [SEEK
] button is pressed,
it increases the band frequency to automatically select channel. Stops at the
previous frequency if no channel is
found.
5. Preset Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 second to play the channel saved in each
button. Push Preset button for 0.8 second or longer to save current channel to
the respective button with a beep.
7. SETUP Button
Press this button to turn to the SCROLL
option and the other adjustment mode.
If no action is taken for 5 seconds after
pressing the button, it will return to the
play mode. (After entering SETUP
mode, move between items using the
left, right and PUSH functions of the
[TUNE] knob.)
The Setup changes in the order of
• GENERAL MODEL (CDP)
4 119
Features of your vehicle
• GENERAL MODEL (CDC)
• EUROPE MODEL (CDP)
• SCROLL
This function is used to display characters longer than the LCD text display and
can be turned ON/OFF through the
sound quality control knob.
• SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
This function automatically adjusts the
volume level according to the speed of
the vehicle and can be turned ON/OFF
through the sound quality control knob.
• AF (AF MENU indication is possible
with RDS MENU )
Select this item to turn the AF(Alternate
Frequency) feature ON or OFF.
• NEWS (NEWS MENU indication is possible with RDS MENU )
Turns the automatic NEWS reception
feature ON or OFF.
• EUROPE MODEL (CDC)
• REGION (REGION MENU indication is
possible with RDS MENU )
Selects whether REGION code is used
(“ON”) or not (“OFF”) once the radio
determines the AF jump condition. If
AUTO is selected, AF jump condition is
determined automatically via PI reception status.
4 120
• TA VOL (TA VOL MENU indication is
possible with RDS MENU )
Adjusts the TA (Traffic Announcement)
volume level.
❈ RDS MENU : RDS MENU includes
AF/ NEWS/ REGION/ TA VOL MENU
sequentially.
• PHONE (if available)
Select this item to enter BLUETOOTH®
wireless technology setup mode. Refer to
“BLUETOOTH® wireless technology
PHONE OPERATION” section for
detailed information.
• ClOCK
Press the [SETUP] button. Use the volume controller to adjust the clock in the
following order: CLOCK . ENTER . hour
or minute. Adjust the hour and press the
[ENTER] button to set. Use the same
method to adjust the minute and press
the [ENTER] button to complete and exit
from clock adjustment mode. Pressing
the [SETUP] button while in POWER
OFF screen will allow the user to make
immediately adjustments to the clock.
Features of your vehicle
• POWER BASS (P.BASS)
Based on psychoacoustic technology,
this technology overcomes BASS limitations which may occur due to the limited
number and size of speaker to offer
dynamic BASS sound quality.
It is possible to adjust in 3 levels of LOW/
MID/ HIGH.
OFF ➟ LOW ➟ MID ➟ HIGH
❈ AM, AMA is not supported.
❈ CDP ONLY.
• RETURN
This function displays the previous
MODE screen.
8. Manual Channel Selector &
Sound Quality Control Knob
Turn this control while listening to a radio
channel to manually adjust frequency.
Turn clockwise to increase frequency
and counterclockwise to reduce frequency.
Pressing TUNE button changes the
BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and
BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display. After selecting each mode, rotate
the Audio control knob clockwise or
counterclockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned counter
clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound will be
attenuated).
9. DISP (DARK) Button
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
Turn the LCD Display & Backlight on/off
when [DISP] button press.
❈ GENERAL : DISP, EUROPE : DARK
10. TA Selection Button
FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenuated).
In FM, CD, AUX mode, turns on/off the
reception of TA channels of RDS.
11. PTY (FOLDER) Button
• Moves [
PTY(FOLDER)] Button
when searching PTY in RDS
Broadcasting Program Type selection.
• Moves [PTY(FOLDER)
] button
when searching PTY in RDS
Broadcasting Program Type selection.
4 121
Features of your vehicle
CDP, CDC, AUX (GENERAL)
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Eject Button
3. INFO Button
4. Automatic Track Selection Button
5. RANDOM Play Button
6. REPEAT Button
7. CD Selection Button
8. CD Indicator (CDP ONLY)
9. FOLDER Button
10. Search/ENTER Button
11. SCAN Play Button
12. DISC Selection Button
13. CD LOAD Button (CDC ONLY)
14. AUX Selection Button
❋There will be no
4 122
logo if the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
CDP, CDC, AUX (EUROPE_RDS)
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Eject Button
3. INFO Button
4. Automatic Track Selection Button
5. RANDOM Play Button
6. REPEAT Button
7. CD/AUX Selection Button
8. CD Indicator (CDP ONLY)
9. PTY (FOLDER) Button
10. Search/ENTER Button
11. SCAN Play Button
12. DISC Selection Button
13. CD LOAD Button (CDC ONLY)
❋There will be no
logo if the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature is not supported.
4 123
Features of your vehicle
1. CD Loading Slot
Please face printed side upward and
gently push in. When the ignition switch
is on ACC or ON and power is off, power
is automatically turned on if the CD is
loaded. This CDP supports only 12cm
CD. If VCD, Data CD are loaded,
"Reading Error" message will appear
and CD will be ejected.
4. Automatic Track Selection
Button
Push
button for less than 0.8 seconds
to eject the CD during CD playback. This
button is enabled when ignition switch is
off.
• ALL EJECT (CDC Only)
Press this button for more than 0.8 seconds to eject all discs inside the deck in
respective order.
• Push [
SEEK(TRACK)] button for
less than 0.8 second to play from the
beginning of current song.
• Push [
SEEK(TRACK)] button for
less than 0.8 second and press again
within 1 seconds to play the previous
song.
• Push [
SEEK(TRACK)] button for
0.8 or longer to initiate reverse direction high speed sound search of current song.
• Push [SEEK(TRACK)]
] button for
less than 0.8 second to play the next
song.
• Push [SEEK(TRACK)]
] button for
0.8 or longer to initiate high speed
sound search of current song.
3. INFO Button
5. RANDOM Play Button
Displays the information of the current
CD TRACK (FILE) as below when the
button is pressed each time.
• CDDA : Disc Title ➟ Disc Artist ➟ Track
Title ➟ Track Artist ➟ Total Track...
• MP3/WMA : File Name ➟ Title ➟ Artist
➟ Album ➟ Folder ➟ Total File... (not
displayed if the information is not available on the DISC.)
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more than
0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’ mode.
• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc
are played back in a random
sequence.
• ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in
a disc are played back in the random
sequence.
2. CD Eject Button
4 124
6. REPEAT Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more than 0.8
seconds to activate ‘FLD RPT’ mode.
• RPT : Only a track (file) is repeatedly
played back.
• FOLDER RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only
files in a folder are repeatedly played
back.
• ALL RPT (AUDIO CD Only) : Only files
in a DISC are repeatedly played back.
7. CD or CD/AUX Selection Button
• CD Selection Button
If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode.
If no CD, it displays "NO Disc" for 3
seconds and returns to the previous
mode.
• CD/AUX Selection Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
switches to the AUX mode from the
other mode to play the sound from the
auxiliary player. If the CD is loaded,
turns to CD mode, and if a device is
connected to AUX then it toggles. CD
➟ AUX ➟ CD... when the button is
pressed each time. (It will not turn to
AUX if the auxiliary device is not connected)
Features of your vehicle
8. CD Indicator (CDP Only)
11. SCAN Play Button
When car ignition switch is ACC or ON
and if the CD is loaded, this indicator is
lighted. If the CD is ejected the light is
turned off.
Plays first 10 seconds of each song in
the DISC. To cancel the mode, press the
button once again.
12. DISC Selection Button
9. Folder Moving Button
• Moves [
PTY(FOLDER)] button
child folder of the current folder and
displays the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Moves [PTY(FOLDER)
] button parent folder and displays the first song in
the folder. Press TUNE/ENTER knob to
move to the folder displayed.
10. Search/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to display the songs before the currently
played song. Press the button to skip and
play the selected song.
• [
DISC]
disc to the
• [DISC
]
disc to the
Change Button Changes
previous disc.
Change Button Changes
next disc.
13. CD LOAD Button
Push [LOAD] button to load CDs to available CDC deck (from 1~6). Push [LOAD]
button for more than 2 seconds to load
into all available decks. The last CD will
play. 10 seconds idle status will disable
loading process.
14. AUX Selection Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
turns to AUX mode from the other mode
to play the sound from the auxiliary player. If no auxiliary device is connected, it
displays "NO Media" for 3 seconds and
returns to the previous mode (GENERAL
ONLY).
4 125
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING USB
DEVICE
• To use the external USB device,
make sure the device is not
mounted when starting up the
vehicle and mount the device
after starting up.
• If you start the vehicle when the
USB device is mounted, it may
damage the USB device. (USB is
not ESA)
• If the vehicle is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take cautions for static electricity
when mounting or dismounting
the external USB device.
• Encoded MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.
(Continued)
4 126
(Continued)
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the connected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB devices is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recognized.
• Only the USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32.
• USB device without USB IF
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with human body or any
object.
• If you repeat mounting or dismounting USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
• You might hear strange noise
when mounting or dismounting a
USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you dismount the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device
can be damaged or malfunction.
Therefore, mount the external
USB device when the engine is
turned off or in another mode.
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device, but this
is not a trouble Please wait for a
moment.
• Do not use the USB device for
other purposes than playing
music files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
the recharger or heater using
USB I/F may lower the performance or cause trouble.
• If you use devices such as the
USB hub you purchased separately, the vehicle’s audio system
may not recognize the USB
device. Connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If USB device is divided by logical
drives, only the music files on the
highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera
those are not recognizable by
standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• USB devices other than standardized goods (METAL COVER TYPE
USB) can be unrecognizable.
• USB flash memory reader (such
as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
lost while using this AUDIO, It is
recommended to back up important data on a personal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products as
shown below.
4 127
Features of your vehicle
USING USB (GENERAL)
1. INFO Selection Button
2. Track Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. USB (AUX) Selection Button
6. Folder Button
7. Search/ENTER Button
8. SCAN Selection Button
❋There will be no
4 128
logo if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
USING USB (EUROPE_RDS)
1. INFO Selection Button
2. Track Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. USB (AUX) Selection Button
6. PTY (FOLDER) Button
7. Search/ENTER Button
8. SCAN Selection Button
❋There will be no
logo if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
4 129
Features of your vehicle
1. INFO Selection Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
6. Folder Moving Button
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of File Name ➟
Title ➟ Artist ➟ Album ➟ Foder ➟ Total
File... (Displays no information if the file
has no song information.)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate 'RDM' mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate 'ALL RDM'
mode.
• RDM : Only files in a folder are played
back in a random sequence.
• ALL RDM (A.RDM) : All files in a USB
memory are played back in the random
sequence.
• Moves [
PTY(FOLDER)] button
child folder of the current folder and
displays the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Moves [PTY(FOLDER)
] button parent folder and displays the first song in
the folder. Press TUNE/ENTER knob to
move to the folder displayed
2. Track Moving Button
• Press the [SEEK(TRACK)
] button
for less than 0.8 second to play from
the beginning of the song currently
played. Press the button for less than
0.8 second and press it again within 1
seconds to move and play the previous
track. Press the button for 0.8 second
or longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the [
SEEK(TRACK)] button
for less than 0.8 second to move to the
next track. Press the button for 0.8 second or longer to play the song in forward direction in fast speed.
4. REPEAT Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate 'RPT' mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate 'FLD RPT'
mode.
• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played
back.
• FOLDER RPT : Only files in a folder
are repeatedly played back.
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to display the songs before the currently
played song. Press the button to skip and
play the selected song.
8. SCAN Selection Button
5. USB (AUX) Selection Button
If USB is connected, it switches to the
USB mode from the other mode to play
the song files stored in the USB. If no CD
and auxiliary device is not connected, it
displays "NO Media" for 3 seconds and
returns to the previous mode.
4 130
7. Search/ENTER Button
Plays 10 seconds of each song in the
USB device. Press the button once again
to cancel scanning.
Features of your vehicle
RUNNING iPod® (GENERAL)
1. INFO Selection Button
2. Track Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. iPod (AUX) Selection Button
6. PRESET 6 (MENU) Button
7. Search/ENTER Button
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
❋There will be no
logo if the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature is not supported.
4 131
Features of your vehicle
RUNNING iPod® (EUROPE_RDS)
1. INFO Selection Button
2. Track Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. iPod (AUX) Selection Button
6. PRESET 6 (MENU) Button
7. Search/ENTER Button
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
❋There will be no
4 132
logo if the Bluetooth® wireless technology feature is not supported.
Features of your vehicle
3. RANDOM Playback Button
7. Search/ENTER Button
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of Title ➟ Artist
➟ Album... (Displays no information if the
file has no song information.)
Press the button for less than 0.8 second
to activate or deactivate the random playback of the songs within the current category. Press the button for longer than
0.8 second to randomly play all songs in
the entire album of the iPod.
Press the button once again to cancel
the mode.
2. Track Moving Button
4. REPEAT Button
• Press the [
SEEK(TRACK)] button
for less than 0.8 second to play from
the beginning of the song currently
played. Press the button for less than
0.8 second and press it again within 1
seconds to move and play the previous
track. Press the button for 0.8 second
or longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the [SEEK(TRACK)
] button
for less than 0.8 second to move to the
next track. Press the button for 0.8 second or longer to play the song in forward direction in fast speed.
Repeats the song currently played.
When you turn the button clockwise, it
will display the songs (category) next to
the song currently played (category in
the same level).
Also, when you turn the button counterclockwise, it will display the songs (category) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
If you want to listen to the song displayed
in the song category, press the button,
then it will skip to the selected song and
play.
When the iPod is connected, the 'iPod'
icon will be displayed on the top left corner of the display screen.
1. INFO Selection Button
5. iPod(AUX) Selection Button
If iPod is connected, it switches to the
iPod mode from the CD mode to play the
song files stored in the iPod. If no CD and
auxiliary device is not connected, it displays "NO Media" for 3 seconds and
returns to the previous mode.
6. PRESET 6 (MENU) Button
MENU (preset6) you will be able to
search through the lower category of the
selected category. The order of iPod's
category
is
SONG,
ALBUMES,
ARTISTS, GENRES, and iPod.
4 133
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE FOR USING iPod
DEVICE
• Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played. (iPod models
supported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,
5G)
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod crashes due to its own trouble, reset iPod. (Reset: Refer to iPod
manual)
• iPod may not operate normally on low
battery.
4 134
CAUTION IN USING iPod
DEVICE
• You need the power cable exclusive for iPod in order to operate
iPod with the buttons on the
audio system. The PC cable provided by Apple may cause malfunction and do not use it for
vehicle use.
• When connecting the device with
iPod cable, push in the jack fully
not to interfere with communication.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of iPod and the audio system, the
sound effects of both devices will
overlap each and might cause
reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of iPod when adjusting
the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer
of iPod.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the iPod cable is connected, the system can be switched to
the AUX mode even without the
iPod device and can cause noise.
Disconnect iPod cable when you
are not using the iPod device.
• When the iPod is not used at
audio system, iPod cable has to
be separate from iPod device.
Origin display of iPod may not be
displayed.
Features of your vehicle
BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY PHONE OPERATION
❈ There will be no Bluetooth® wireless
technology function if the Bluetooth®
wireless technology feature is not supported.
1
2
4
5
3
1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2. MUTE : Mute the microphone during a
call
3. TALK button : Activates voice recognition.
4. CALL button : Places and transfers
calls.
5. END button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
■ What is Bluetooth® wireless technology
Bluetooth® wireless technology is a wireless technology that allows multiple
devices to be connected in a short range,
low-powered devices like hands-free,
stereo headset, wireless remocon, etc.
For more information, visit the Bluetooth®
wireless
technology
website
at
www.Bluetooth.com
■ General Features
• This
audio
system
supports
Bluetooth® wireless technology handsfree and stereo-headset features.
- HANDS-FREE feature: Making or
receiving calls wirelessly through
voice recognition.
- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing
music from cellular phones (that supports A2DP feature) wirelessly.
• Voice recognition engine of the
Bluetooth® wireless technology system supports 10 types of languages:
French
German
UK English
Spanish
Dutch
Italian
Danish
Russian
Polish
Swedish
✽ NOTICE
• The phone must be paired to the system before using Bluetooth® wireless
technology features.
• Only one selected (linked) cellular
phone can be used with the system at
a time.
• Some phones are not fully compatible
with this system.
4 135
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING
BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS
TECHNOLOGY CELLULAR PHONE
• Do not use a cellular phone or
perform Bluetooth® wireless technology settings (e.g. pairing a
phone) while driving.
• Some Bluetooth® wireless technology-enabled phones may not
be recognized by the system or
fully compatible with the system.
• Before using Bluetooth® wireless
technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth® wireless technology
operations.
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
wireless technology related features.
• You will not be able to use handsfree feature when your phone (in
the car) is outside of the cellular
service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a
underground, in a mountainous
area, etc.)
(Continued)
4 136
(Continue)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is
too loud, it may be difficult to hear
the other person’s voice during a
call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects.
Communications with Bluetooth®
wireless technology system or
cellular service stations can be
disturbed.
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth® wireless technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth® wireless
technology-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio
system. In this case, store the
device in a different location may
resolve the situation.
Features of your vehicle
■ Voice Recognition Activation
• The voice recognition engine contained in the Bluetooth® wireless technology System can be activated in the
following conditions:
- Button Activation
The voice recognition system will be
active when the
button is
pressed and after the sound of a
Beep.
- Active Listening
The voice recognition system will be
active for a period of time when the
Voice Recognition system has asked
for a customer response.
• At any time if you say “help”, the system will announce what commands are
available.
■ Menu tree
The menu tree identifies available voice
recognition Bluetooth® wireless technology functions.
Setup
Pair phone
Select phone
Delete phone
Change priority
■ Voice Operation Tip
To get the best performance out of the
Voice Recognition System, observe the
following:
- Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the window to eliminate surrounding noise (traffic noise,
vibration sounds, etc), which may disturb recognizing the voice command
correctly.
- Speak a command after a beep sound
within 5 seconds. Otherwise the command will not be received properly.
- Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
Bluetooth off
• The system can recognize single digitsfrom zero to nine while number
greater than ten will not be recognized.
Phonebook
Add entry
By voice
By Phone
• If the command is not recognized, the
system will announce "Pardon" or No
input voice signal from microphone.
(No response)
• The system shall cancel voice recognition mode in following cases : When
pressing the
button and saying
cancel following the beep. When not
making a call and pressing the
button. When voice recognition has failed
3 consecutive times.
Change
Delete name
Call
By name
By number
4 137
Features of your vehicle
■ Information Display
■ Phone Setup
<Active Call>
All Bluetooth® wireless technology-related operations can be performed by voice
command or by manual operation.
2) Select “PHONE” item by rotating the
TUNE knob, then push the knob.
- By Voice Command:
Press
button on the steering wheel
to activate voice recognition.
3) Select desired item by rotating the
TUNE knob, then push the knob.
<Voice Recognition>
The Bluetooth® wireless technology icon
appears on the upper side of audio display when a phone is connected.
4 138
- By Manual Operation:
1) Push the TUNE knob to enter SETUP
mode
• Pairing phone
Before using Bluetooth® wireless technology features, the phone must be
paired (registered) to the audio system.
Up to 5 phones can be paired in the system.
Note:
• The pairing procedure of the phone
varies according to each phone
model. Before attempting to pair
phone, please see your phone’s
User’s Guide for instructions.
• Once pairing with the phone is completed, there is no need to pair with
that phone again unless the phone
is deleted manually from the audio
system (refer “Deleting Phone” section) or the vehicle’s information is
removed from the phone.
Features of your vehicle
1. Press
button.
2. Say “Set Up”.
- The system replies with available
commands.
- To skip the information message,
press
again and then a beep is
heard.
3. Say “Pair Phone”
4. Proceed at Next step.
5. Say the name of your phone when
prompted.
- Use any name to uniquely describe
your phone.
- Use Full name to voice tag.
- Not use to short name or similar to
voice command.
6. Bluetooth® wireless technology system will repeat the name you stated.
7. Say "Yes" to confirm.
8. The audio displays “searching ---passkey: 0000” and asks you to initiate
pairing procedure from the phone.
9. Search the Bluetooth® wireless technology system on your phone .Your
phone should display your [vehicle
model name] on the Bluetooth® wireless technology device list. Then
attempt pairing on your phone.
10. After Pairing is completed, your
phone will start to transfer phone/
contact list to the audio system.
- This process may take from a few
minutes to over 10 minutes depending on the phone model and number
of entries in the phone/contact list.
11. By manual operation:
- Select “PAIR” in PHONE menu,
thenproceed from step 5
Note:
• Until the audio displays “Transfer
Complete”, Bluetooth® wireless
technology hands-free feature may
not be fully operational.
• If the phone is paired to two or more
vehicles of the same model, some
phones may not handle Bluetooth®
wireless technology devices of that
name correctly. In this case, you
may need to change the name displayed on your phone.
For example, if the vehicles' name is
HMC, you may need to change the
name displayed on you phone from
HMC.
Refer to your phone User’s Guide,
or contract your cellular carrier or
phone manufacturer for instructions.
• Connecting phone
When the Bluetooth® wireless technology system is enabled, the phone previously used is automatically selected and
re-connected. If you want to select different phone previously paired, the phone
can be selected through “Select Phone”
menu.
Only a selected phone can be used with
the hands-free system at a time.
1. Press
button.
2. Say "Set Up".
3. Say "Select Phone" after prompt
- The system lists all the registered
phone names.
4. Say the name or number of desired
phone from the list.
5. Say "Yes" to confirm.
6. By manual operation:
- Select “SELECT” in PHONE menu,
then select desired phone from the
list.
4 139
Features of your vehicle
• Deleting Phone
The paired phone can be deleted.
- When the phone is deleted, all the information associated with that phone is
also be deleted (including phonebook).
- If you want to use the deleted phone
with the audio system again, pairing
procedure must be completed once
more.
• Changing Priority
When several phones are paired to the
audio system, the system attempts to
connect following order when the
Bluetooth® wireless technology system
is enabled:
1) “Priority” checked phone.
2) Previously connected phone
3) Gives up auto connection.
1. Press
button.
2. Say “Set Up”.
3. Say “Delete Phone” after prompt.
- The system lists all the registered
phone names.
4. Say the name or number of desired
phone from the list.
5. Say “Yes” to confirm.
6. By manual operation:
- Select “DELETE” in PHONE menu,
then select desired phone from the
list.
1. Press
button.
2. Say “Set Up”.
3. Say “Change Priority” after prompt.
- The system lists all the registered
phone names.
4. Say the name or number of desired
phone from the list.
5. Say “Yes” to confirm.
6. By manual operation:
- Select “PRIORITY” in PHONE menu,
then select desired phone from the
list.
4 140
• BT SETUP
1. Adjusting Bluetooth® wireless technology. Volume Bluetooth® wireless technology system volume can be adjusted
separately from main volume of the
audio system. Volume control is available by manual operation only.
- Select “BT VOL” in PHONE menu,
adjust volume to desired level by
turning the TUNE knob, then press
the knob again to confirm.
Features of your vehicle
2. Adjusting Bluetooth® wireless technology. language
Select “BT Voice Recognition language” in PHONE menu, adjust language to desired language by turning
the TUNE knob, then press the knob
again to confirm.
ex) French/ German/ UK ENGLISH/
Spanish/ Dutch/ Italian/ Danish/
Russian/ Polish/ Swedish.
NOTE:
The phone needs to be paired again
after changing system language.
• Avoid resting your thumb or finger
on the talk button as the language
could unintentionally change.
• Avoid resting your thumb or finger
on the talk button as the language
could unintentionally change.
• Turning Bluetooth® wireless technology ON/OFF
Bluetooth® wireless technology system
can be enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF)
by this menu.
- If Bluetooth® wireless technology is disabled, all the commands related to
Bluetooth® wireless technology system
prompts whether you wish to turn
Bluetooth® wireless technology ON or
not.
1. Press
button.
2. Say “Set Up”
3. Say “Bluetooth Off” after prompt.
4. Say “Yes” to confirm.
5. By manual operation:
- Select “BT Off” in PHONE menu,
then after announcement, say “YES”
to confirm.
■ Phone Book (In-Vehicle)
• Adding Entry
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered. Entries registered in the
phone can also be transferred.
• Adding Entry by Voice
1. Press
button.
2. Say "Phonebook".
- The system replies with all available
commands.
- To skip the information message,
press
again and then a beep is
heard.
3. Say "Add Entry".
4. Say "By Voice" to proceed.
5. Say the name of the entry when
prompted.
6. Say “Yes”to confirm.
7. Say the phone number of that entry
when prompted.
8. Say “Store” if phone number input is
finished.
9. Say a phone number type. “Home”,
“Work”, “Mobile”, “Other” or “Default” is
available.
10. Say “Yes” to complete adding entry.
11. Say “Yes” to store additional location
for this contact, or say “Cancel” to finish the process.
4 141
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The system can recognize single digits
from zero to nine. Numbers that are
ten or greater cannot be recognized.
• You can enter each digit individually
or group digits together in preferred
string lengths.
• To speed up input, it is a good idea to
group all digits into a continuous
string.
• The display corresponding to each
operation appears on the screen as follows:
• Input operation example:
1. Say: “Nine, nine, five”
➟ Display: “995”
2. And say: “Seven, three, four”
➟ Display: “995734”
• Adding Entry by Phone
1. Press
button.
2. Say "Phonebook".
3. Say "Add Entry" after prompt.
4. Say "By Phone" to proceed.
5. Say “Yes” to confirm.
6. Your phone will start to transfer phone/
contact list to the audio system.
This process may take over 10 minutes depending on the phone model
and number of entries
7. Wait till the audio displays “Transfer
Complete” message.
• Changing Name
The registered names can be modified.
1. Press
button.
2. Say “Phonebook”
3. Say “Change Name” after prompt.
4. Say the name of the entry (voice tag)
5. Say “Yes” to confirm.
6. Say new desired name.
• Deleting Name
The registered names can be deleted.
1. Press
button.
2. Say “Phonebook”
3. Say “Delete Name” after prompt.
4. Say the name of the entry (voice tag)
5. Say “Yes” to confirm.
■ Making a Phone Call
• Calling by Name
A phone call can be made by speaking
names registered in the audio system.
1. Press
button.
2. Say "Call".
3. Say “Name” when prompted.
4. Say desired name (voice tag).
5. Say desired location (phone number
type). Only stored locations can be
selected.
6. Say “Yes” to confirm and make a call.
✽ TIP
A shortcut to each of the following
functions is available:
1. Say “Call Name”
2. Say “Call <john>”
3. Say “Call <john> at <home>”
4 142
Features of your vehicle
• Dialing by Number
A phone call can be made by dialing the
spoken numbers. The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine.
1. Press
button.
2. Say “Call”.
3. Say “Number” when prompted.
4. Say desired phone numbers.
5. Say “Dial” to complete the number and
make a call.
✽ TIP
■ Receiving a Phone Call
A shortcut to each of the following
functions is available:
1. Say “Dial Number”
2. Say “Dial <digit>”
When receiving a phone call, a ringtone
is audible from speakers and the audio
system changes into telephone mode.
When receiving a phone call, “Incoming”
message and incoming phone number
(if available) are displayed on the audio.
• To Answer a Call:
- Press
button on the steering
wheel.
• To Reject a Call:
- Press
button on the steering wheel.
• To Adjust Ring Volume:
- Use VOLUME buttons on the steering
wheel.
• To Transfer a Call to the Phone (Secret
Call):
- Press and hold
button on the steering wheel until the audio system transfers a call to the phone.
4 143
Features of your vehicle
■ Talking on the Phone
When talking on the phone, “Active Calls”
message and the other party’s phone
number (if available) are displayed on the
audio.
• To Mute the Microphone
- Press
button on the steering wheel.
• To Finish a Call
- Press
button on the steering wheel.
4 144
✽ NOTICE
In the following situations, you or the
other party may have difficulty hearing
each other:
1. Speaking at the same time, your voice
may not reach each other parties.
(This is not a malfunction.) Speak
alternately with the other party on the
phone.
2. Keep the Bluetooth® wireless technology volume to a low level. High-level
volume may result in distortion and
echo.
3. When driving on a rough road.
4. When driving at high speeds.
5. When the window is open.
6. When the air conditioning vents are
facing the microphone.
7. When the sound of the air conditioning fan is loud.
■ Using the head unit as
Bluetooth® wireless technology
music
The head unit supports A2DP (Audio
Advanced Distribution Profile) and
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
Profile).
Both profiles are available for listening to
the MP3 music via Bluetooth® wireless
technology cellular phone supporting
above Bluetooth® wireless technology
profiles.
To play MP3 music from the Bluetooth®
wireless technology cellular phone, press
the [AUX] button until “MP3 Play” is displayed on the LCD.
Then try playing music by phone.
When playing music from the Bluetooth®
wireless technology cellular phone, the
head unit displays MP3 MODE.
Features of your vehicle
NOTE:
• Not only MP3 files, all the sounds
that the phone supports can be
heard by the audio system.
• The Bluetooth® wireless technology
cellular phones shall feature A2DP
and AVRCP functions.
• Some A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth®
wireless technology cellular phones
may not play music through the
head unit on first try. Please try the
below;
i.e : Menu ➟ Filemanager ➟ Music ➟
Option ➟ Play via Bluetooth
• Please refer to User’s Guide of your
phone for more detailed information. To stop music, try stop music
by the phone and change audio
mode to different one. (e.g. FM, CD,
iPod, ...)
4 145
Before driving / 5-3
Key positions / 5-5
Engine start/stop button / 5-8
Manual transaxle / 5-14
Automatic transaxle / 5-17
Four wheel drive (4WD) / 5-23
Brake system / 5-30
Cruise control system / 5-45
Economical operation / 5-49
Special driving conditions / 5-51
Winter driving / 5-55
Driving your vehicle
Trailer towing / 5-59
Vehicle weight / 5-68
5
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
5 2
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle
Necessary inspections
Before starting
• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in
Section 7, “Maintenance”.
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
vehicle into “Drive” or “Reverse”.
5 3
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions
and
judgement.
Driving while under the influence of
drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
5 4
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be careful when operating what may disturb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.
✽ NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
OXM059001
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.
OCM059002
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START position to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
5 5
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
is not a substitute for the parking
brake. Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in 1st gear for the
manual transaxle or P (Park) for
the automatic transaxle, set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is
in motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily injury
or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an accident.
5 6
Starting the engine
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if
equipped).
Starting the gasoline engine
(if equipped)
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
Driving your vehicle
Starting the diesel engine
(if equipped)
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P(park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.
Glow indicator light
W-60
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to pre-heat the engine. Then the
glow indicator light will illuminate.
4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn
the ignition switch to the START position and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbo charger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or
turbo charger unit.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine were not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position during 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
5 7
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Engine start/stop button position
OFF
Not illuminated
OLM059005
Illuminated engine start/stop button
Whenever the front door is opened, the
engine start/stop button will illuminate for
your convenience. The light will go off
after about 30 seconds when the door is
closed. It will also go off immediately
when the theft-alarm system is armed.
5 8
• With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), stop
the vehicle then press the engine
start/stop button.
• With automatic transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
When you press the engine start/stop
button without the shift lever in the P
(Park) position, the engine start/stop button will not change to the OFF position
but to the ACC position.
Also, the steering wheel locks when the
engine start/stop button is in the OFF
position to protect you against theft. It
locks when the door is opened or when
you pull out the smart key from the smart
key holder.
If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the
warning chime will sound. Try locking the
steering wheel again. If the problem is
not solved, have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In addition, if the engine start/stop button
is in the OFF position after the driver's
door is opened, the steering wheel will
not lock and the warning chime will
sound. In such a situation, close the door.
Then the steering wheel will lock and the
warning chime will stop.
✽ NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the engine start/stop button
will not work. Press the engine
start/stop button while turning the
steering wheel right and left to release
the tension.
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),
only when the vehicle is not in
motion. In an emergency situation
while the vehicle is in motion, you are
able to turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the engine
start/stop button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3
seconds. If the vehicle is still moving,
you can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by pressing the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
ACC(Accessory)
ON
Orange indicator
Blue indicator
• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the ACC position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• With automatic transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button while it
is in the OFF position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and electrical accessories are operational.
If the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC position for more than 1 hour, the
button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.
• With automatic transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the engine start/stop button in the ON
position for a long time. The battery may
discharge, because the engine is not
running.
5 9
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
START/RUN
If you leave the engine start/stop button
in the ACC or ON position for a long
time, the battery will discharge.
Not illuminated
• With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the clutch
pedal and brake pedal, then press the
engine start/stop button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
• With automatic transaxle
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
or the N (Neutral) position. For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
✽ NOTICE
If you press the engine start/stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal for
manual transaxle vehicles or without
depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not
start and the engine start/stop button
changes as follow:
OFF ➔ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC
5 10
WARNING
• Never press the engine start/stop
button while the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the
driver's seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in P
(Park), set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the engine start/
stop button or any other controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in the
area could cause loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver's seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an
accident.
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal.
Starting the gasoline engine
(if equipped)
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while starting the engine.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button.
5. In extremely cold weather (below 18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has not
been operated for several days, let the
engine warm up without depressing
the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing the
accelerator.
Starting the diesel engine
(if equipped)
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while pressing the engine start/stop
button to the START position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
5 11
Driving your vehicle
Glow indicator light
W-60
3. Press the engine start/stop button
while depressing the brake pedal.
4. Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the illuminated glow indicator
goes off. (approximately 5 seconds)
5. The engine starts running when the
glow indicator goes off.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine start/stop button is pressed
once more while the engine is pre-heating, the engine may start.
5 12
Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immediately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or turbocharger unit.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position or above, if any door
is opened, the system checks for the
smart key. If the smart key is not in the
vehicle, the "
" indicator and the
“KEY OUT” indicator will blink. And if
all doors are closed, the chime will
sound for 5 seconds. The indicator or
warning will turn off while the vehicle is
moving. Always have the smart key
with you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle
touch the engine start/stop button
or related parts.
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If it
is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button for 10 seconds while
it is in the ACC position. The engine
can start without depressing the brake
pedal. But for your safety always
depress the brake pedal before starting the engine.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
is in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If the traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving and
press the engine start/stop button
in an attempt to restart the engine.
OLM059006
✽ NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by inserting the smart key
in the smart key holder. When you
pull out the smart key from the smart
key holder, press the smart key and
pull it out.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Do not press the engine start/stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
blown.
5 13
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation
■ Type A
*
■ Type B
The shift lever can be moved without
pulling the ring (1).
The ring (1) must be pulled up while
moving the shift lever.
* if equipped
OLM059009/OLM059009L
5 14
The manual transaxle has 5 (or 6*) forward gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.
Press the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)
The gearshift lever must be returned to
the neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The ring located immediately
below the shift knob must be pulled
upward while moving the shift lever to the
R position. (Type A)
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
*: if equipped
CAUTION
• When downshifting from fifth
gear to fourth gear, caution
should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift lever
sideways in such a manner that
second gear is engaged. Such a
drastic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such overrevving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine.
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),
put the shift lever in N (Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, while waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level or uphill grade,
and shifted into R (Reverse) on a
downhill grade. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are not
followed in the order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may move
and cause a serious accident
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal while
the parking brake is released and
the shift lever not in the
N(Neutral) position.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way
to the floor before shifting, then released
slowly. The clutch pedal should always be
fully released while driving. Do not rest
your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold
the vehicle on an incline. This causes
unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or
parking brake to hold the vehicle on an
incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal
rapidly and repeatedly.
CAUTION
When operating the clutch pedal,
press the clutch pedal down fully. If
you don’t press the clutch pedal
fully, the clutch may be damaged or
noise may occur.
5 15
Driving your vehicle
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is traveling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
5 16
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
reverse. The transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To shift into reverse,
depress the clutch, move the shift lever
to neutral, wait three seconds, then
shift to the reverse position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Type B
Type A
Depress the brake pedal when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped shift lock system.
The shift lever can be moved freely.
OLM059010/OLM059010R
5 17
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle operation
The highly efficient automatic transaxle
has 6 forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before
shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order identified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an upgrade, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator lights in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
5 18
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle”, in this manual.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
5 19
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Spor ts
mode
OLM059012
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
5 20
• In sports mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving on
a slippery road. Push the shift lever to
the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st
gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the
vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
Type A
1. Press the shift-lock release button.
2. Move the shift lever.
3. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
■ Type A
OLM059011
■ Type B
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. Even the ignition switch is in
LOCK position, the key cannot be
removed.
Type B
1. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering
the shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver (or key) into the
access hole and press down on the
screwdriver (or key).
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
OLM059013
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
5 21
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into "P"
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
vehicle in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
5 22
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Moving up a steep grade from a standing start
To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will
help prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards.
Driving your vehicle
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED)
Engine power can be delivered to all front
and rear wheels for maximum traction.
4WD is useful when extra traction is
required on road, such as, when driving
on slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-covered
roads. These vehicles are not designed
for challenging off-road use. Occasional
off-road use such as established
unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is
always important when traveling off-highway that the driver carefully reduces the
speed to a level that does not exceed the
safe operating speed for those conditions. In general, off-road conditions provide less traction and braking effectiveness than normal road conditions. The
driver must be especially alert to avoid
driving on slopes which tilt the vehicle to
either side.
These factors must be carefully considered when driving off-road. Keeping the
vehicle in contact with the driving surface
and under control in these conditions is
always the driver's responsibility for the
safety of him/herself and his or her passengers.
WARNING - Off road driving
This vehicle is designed primarily
for on road use although it can operate effectively off road. However, it
was not designed to drive in challenging off-road conditions. Driving
in conditions that exceed the vehicle's intended design or the driver's
experience level may result in
severe injury or death.
WARNING
When 4WD system warning light
illuminates, 4WD system does not
operate.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Tight corner brake effect
CAUTION - 4WD
When turning sharply on a paved
road at low speed while in fourwheel drive, steering control will be
difficult.
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of four-wheel drive vehicles
caused by the difference in tire rotation at
the four wheels and the zero-degree
alignment of the front wheels and suspension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be carried out with caution.
5 23
Driving your vehicle
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode
Selection button
Indicator light
4WD AUTO
(4WD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
4WD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
✽ NOTICE
Description
• When driving in 4WD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the 4WD mode, the engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels automatically without driver intervention.
• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to 4WD AUTO mode
at speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph), however, the transfer
mode is shifted into 4WD LOCK mode again.
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the 4WD LOCK mode by pushing the 4WD LOCK button (the indicator light goes
off). Driving on normal roads with 4WD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise or vibration.
The noise and vibration will disappear when the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the 4WD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the front wheels.
This shock is not a mechanical failure.
5 24
Driving your vehicle
For safe four-wheel drive operation
WARNING - Four-wheel
driving
The conditions of on-road or offroad that demand four-wheel drive
mean all functions of your vehicle
are exposed to extreme stress than
under normal road conditions. Slow
down and be ready for changes in
the composition and traction of the
surface under your tires. If you
have any doubt about the safety of
the conditions you are facing, stop
and consider the best way to proceed. Do not exceed the ability of
yourself or your vehicle to operate
safely.
• Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehicle.
HILL1
• When you are driving up or down hills
drive as straight as possible. Use
extreme caution in going up or down
steep hills, since you may flip your
vehicle over depending on the grade,
terrain and water/mud conditions.
HILL2
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of steep
hills can be extremely dangerous.
This danger can come from slight
changes in the wheel angle which
can destabilize the vehicle or, even
if the vehicle is maintaining stability under power, it can lose that stability if the vehicle stops its forward
motion. Your vehicle may roll over
without warning and without time
for you to correct a mistake that
could cause serious injury or
death.
5 25
Driving your vehicle
• You must consciously take the effort to
learn how to corner in a 4WD vehicle.
Do not rely on your experience in conventional 2WD vehicles in choosing
safe cornering speed in 4WD mode.
For starters, you must drive more slowly in 4WD.
• Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are
going to drive before you begin driving.
WARNING - Wind danger
If you are driving in heavy wind, the
vehicle's higher center of gravity
decreases your steering control
capacity and requires you to drive
more slowly.
OLM059022L
WARNING - 4WD
Reduce speed when you turn corners. The center of gravity of 4WD
vehicles is higher than that of conventional 2WD vehicles, making
them more likely to roll over when
you turn corners too fast.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab the inside of the steering wheel when you are driving offroad. You may hurt your arm by a
sudden steering maneuver or from
steering wheel rebound due to
impact with objects on the ground.
You could lose control of the steering wheel.
• Always hold the steering wheel firmly
when you are driving off-road.
• Make sure all passengers are wearing
seat belts.
5 26
• If you need to drive in the water, stop
your vehicle, set your transfer to the
4WD LOCK mode and drive at less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
WARNING - Driving
through water
Drive slowly. If you are driving too
fast in water, the water can get into
the engine compartment and wet
the ignition system, causing your
vehicle to suddenly stop. If this
happens and your vehicle is in a
tilted position, your vehicle may roll
over.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the bottom of the vehicle.
• Check your brake condition once you
are out of mud or water. Press the
brake pedal several times as you move
slowly until you feel normal braking
forces return.
• Shorten your scheduled maintenance
interval if you drive in off-road conditions such as sand, mud or water (see
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in section 7). Always wash
your vehicle thoroughly after off road
use, especially cleaning the bottom of
the vehicle.
• Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the performance of the 4WD vehicle is greatly
affected by the condition of the tires.
Be sure to equip the vehicle with four
tires of the same size and type.
• A full time four wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary tow
truck. Make sure that the vehicle is
placed on a flat bed truck for moving.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
WARNING - 4WD driving
• Avoid high cornering speed.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at high speed.
• In a collision, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die
compared to a person wearing a
seat belt.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over
steers to re-enter the roadway. In
the event your vehicle leaves the
roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow, etc.
the vehicle can sometimes be driven out by depressing the accelerator pedal further; however avoid
running the engine continuously at
high rpm because doing so could
damage the 4WD system.
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is
defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV).
SUV’s have higher ground clearance and
a narrower track to make them capable
of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity
than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of
the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, which allows you to
anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger vehicles, any more than low-slung sports
vehicles are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to this
risk, driver and passengers are strongly
recommended to buckle their seat belts.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. There are steps that a driver
can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your roof
rack with heavy cargo, and never modify
your vehicle in any way.
5 27
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility Vehicle
(SUV), failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteristics
(higher ground clearance, narrower track, etc.) give this vehicle
a higher center of gravity than
ordinary vehicles.
• A SUV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a
seat belt. Make sure everyone in
the vehicle is properly buckled
up.
5 28
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide safe ride and
handling capability. Do not use a
size and type of tire and wheel that
is different from the one that is
originally installed on your vehicle.
It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could
lead to steering failure or rollover
and serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all four
tires with the tire and wheel of the
same size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination
not recommended by HYUNDAI for
off road driving, you should not use
these tires for highway driving.
WARNING - Jacked vehicle
While the full-time 4WD vehicle is
being raised on a jack, never start
the engine or cause the tires to
rotate.
There is the danger that rotating
tires touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to go off the jack
and to jump forward.
Driving your vehicle
• Full-time 4WD vehicles must be tested
on a special four wheel chassis
dynamometer.
WARNING - Dynamometer
testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in gear
on the dynamometer. This is very
dangerous as the vehicle can jump
forward and cause serious injury or
death.
✽ NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake while
performing these tests.
• A full-time 4WD vehicle should not be
tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a 2WD
roll tester must be used, perform the
following:
Temporary free roller
Roll tester (speedometer)
OCM051044L
1. Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as shown
in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
• When lifting up the vehicle, do not
operate front and rear wheel separately. All four wheels should be
operated.
• If you need to operate the front
wheel and rear wheel when lifting
up the vehicle, you should
release the parking brake.
5 29
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
(Continued)
5 30
(Continued)
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking performance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s ability to sefely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a highpitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
OLM059014
Parking brake
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Brake wear
Applying the parking brake
Foot type
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then depress the parking brake pedal down as far as possible.
OLM059016
Hand type
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then pull up the parking brake lever as far as possible.
In addition it is recommended that when
parking the vehicle on a gradient, the
shift lever should be in a low gear on
manual transaxle vehicles or in the Park
position on automatic transaxle vehicles.
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
5 31
Driving your vehicle
If the parking brake does not release or
does not release all the way, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
OLM059015
OLM059017
Releasing the parking brake
Foot type
To release the parking brake, depress
the parking brake pedal a second time
while applying the foot brake. The pedal
will automatically extend to the fully
released position.
Hand type
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly depress the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) while holding the button.
5 32
• To prevent unintentional movement when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely positioned in 1st (First) gear or R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle
equipped vehicles and in P (Park)
for automatic transaxle equipped
vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
WARNING
W-75
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated
when the parking brake is applied with
the ignition switch in the START or ON
position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released while
engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate
attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.
ABS (or ESP) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicle
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system
(Electronic
Stability
Program System) may be longer
than for those without it in the following road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
(Continued)
5 33
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESP) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
5 34
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situation warrants and allow the ABS to control the force being delivered to the
brakes.
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, however, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your
vehicle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS
system
is
normal.
Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
5 35
Driving your vehicle
Left-Hand drive Type A
Right-Hand drive Type A
WARNING
Left-Hand drive Type B
Right-Hand drive Type B
OLM059020L/OLM059020/OLM059020R/OLM059037R
Electronic stability program (ESP) (if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering maneuvers. ESP checks where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going. ESP applies the brakes at individual wheels and intervenes in the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.
5 36
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cornering. Electronic stability program
(ESP) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESP installed, always follow all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
Driving your vehicle
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESP will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESP is active.
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Program System is functioning properly.
ESP operation
ESP ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESP and ESP OFF indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESP is turned on.
• Press the ESP OFF button for
at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESP off. (ESP OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESP on, press the ESP OFF
button (ESP OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESP performing an automatic system
self-check and does not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESP is in operation,
ESP indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Program is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to
increase.
5 37
Driving your vehicle
ESP operation off
ESP OFF state
• To cancel ESP operation,
press the ESP OFF button
(ESP OFF indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESP
is off, ESP remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESP will automatically turn on
again.
■ ESP indicator light
■ ESP OFF indicator light
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESP system is operating normally.
The ESP indicator light blinks whenever
ESP is operating or illuminates when
ESP fails to operate.
ESP OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESP is turned off with the button.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESP system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
5 38
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Program
system is only a driving aid; use
precautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved, snowy, or
icy roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESP indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
Driving your vehicle
ESP OFF usage
When driving
• ESP should be turned on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESP off while driving, press the
ESP OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
WARNING
Never press the ESP OFF button
while ESP is operating (ESP indicator light blinks).
If ESP is turned off while ESP is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
✽ NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESP is
turned off (ESP OFF light illuminated). If the ESP is left on, it may prevent the vehicle speed from increasing, and result in false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESP off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESP indicator light (
) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESP OFF indicator light (
) remains
on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESP OFF button to turn
off the ESP, the VSM will also cancel and
the ESP OFF indicator light (
) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESP OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESP OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the Electric Power Steering system or VSM system. If the ESP indicator
light (
) or EPS warning light remains
on, take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
✽ NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9 mph)
on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on a
split-mu road. The split-mu road is
made of surfaces which have different
friction forces.
5 39
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate according to the driver’s
intention, even with installed
VSM. Always follow all the normal
precautions for driving at safe
speeds for the conditions –
including driving inclement
weather and on a slippery road.
• Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tires, make sure they are the
same size as your original tires.
5 40
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip back
on a steep hill when it starts to go after
stopping. The Hill-start Assist Control
(HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping
back by operating the brakes automatically for about 2 seconds. The brakes are
released when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for about
2 seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the
accelerator pedal.
✽ NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESP is off but it does not activate
when the ESP has malfunctioned.
Driving your vehicle
Left-Hand drive Type A
Right-Hand drive Type A
Left-Hand drive Type B
Right-Hand drive Type B
OLM059021L/OLM059021/OLM059021R/OLM059036R
Downhill brake control (DBC)
(if equipped)
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC) supports the driver come down a steep hill without the driver depressing the brake pedal. It slows down the vehicle under 8 km/h
(5mph) with the automatic transaxle or 15 km/h (9 mph) with the manual transaxle
and lets the driver concentrate on steering the vehicle.
DBC defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition is turned on.
The DBC can be turned on or off by pushing the button.
5 41
Driving your vehicle
Mode
Indicator light
Standby
illuminated
Activated
blinks
Temporarily
deactivated
illuminated
OFF
not
illuminated
Description
Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under
40km/h (25mph). The DBC system will turn ON and
enter the standby mode.
The system does not turn ON if the vehicle speed is
over 40km/h (25mph).
In the standby mode, if the vehicle speed is under
35km/h (22mph) while driving down a steep hill, the
DBC will activate automatically.
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:
• The hill is not steep enough.
• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically activate again.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
• The DBC button is pressed again.
• The vehicle speed is over 60km/h (38mph).
WARNING
If the DBC red indicator light illuminates, the system has overheated or something is wrong. The DBC will not activate. If the DBC red indicator light illuminates even though the DBC system has been cooled enough have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
5 42
✽ NOTICE
• The DBC does not turn ON in the P
(Park) position.
• The DBC may not activate if the ESP
(or BAS, if equipped) is activated.
• Noise or vibration may occur from the
brakes when the DBC is activated.
• The rear stop light comes on when the
DBC is activated.
• In a very steep hill even though the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal is
depressed the DBC may not deactivate.
• Always turn OFF the DBC on normal
roads. The DBC might activate from
the standby mode when abrupt corning or driving through speed bumps.
• DBC may activate and cause the
engine to stop in vehicles with manual
transaxle if you drive in 3rd gear (or
above) with DBC on. Do not turn on
DBC when driving in 3rd gear (or
above).
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park your
vehicle, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the P (Park) position. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may move
inadvertently and injure yourself
and others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle
will not stop as quickly if the brakes are
wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle
to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the vehicle
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that
engine braking will help you maintain a
safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
vehicle pointed straight ahead while
you slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping
forward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped.
• Be caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the gear
selector lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
5 43
Driving your vehicle
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
5 44
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
OLM059030L
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without pressing the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated),
the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the vehicle at a constant speed,
for instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
CAUTION
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, since the
engine will be overrevved. If this
happens, depress the clutch pedal
or release the cruise control ONOFF switch.
✽ NOTICE
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
✽ NOTICE
To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position or
starting the engine. This is to check if
the brake switch which is important
part to cancel cruise control is in normal
condition.
5 45
Driving your vehicle
OLM059031L
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the Cruise ON-OFF button on
the steering wheel to turn the system
on. The Cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 40 km/h (25 mph).
5 46
OLM059033L
3. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
SET indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. Release the
accelerator pedal. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
downhill.
OLM059032L
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2.0 km/h (1.2
mph) or 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) each time
you move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.
Driving your vehicle
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
OLM059033L
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2.0 km/h (1.2
mph) or 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) each time
you move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.
OLM059034L
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Press the clutch pedal with a manual
transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 15 km/h (9
mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
5 47
Driving your vehicle
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, move
up the lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
OLM059032L
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph):
If any method other than the cruise
ON/OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when you move the
lever (1) up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
40 km/h (25 mph).
5 48
OLM059031L
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the Cruise ON-OFF button (the
Cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise control operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
kilometers (miles) you can get from a
liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possible, use the
following driving suggestions to help
save money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid
heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed,
especially on the highway, is one of the
most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
This can increase fuel consumption
and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your
foot resting on the brake pedal may
cause the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition.
For better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 7. If you
drive your vehicle in severe conditions,
more frequent maintenance is required
(see Section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the vehicle. This
extra weight can result in increased
fuel consumption and also contribute
to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
5 49
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting engine bucking. If
this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
5 50
Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled
inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine running. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light upand-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1st (First)
and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped
with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transaxle.
Do not race the engine, and spin the
wheels as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle
pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle.
CAUTION
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
✽ NOTICE
The ESP system (if equipped) should be
turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.
5 51
Driving your vehicle
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.
OUN056051
OCM053010
Smooth cornering
Driving at night
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.
5 52
Driving your vehicle
1VQA3003
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
5 53
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
1VQA1004
Highway driving
Tires:
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire failure.
✽ NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
5 54
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death.
Always check the tires for proper
inflation before driving. For proper tire pressures, refer to section
8, “Tires and wheels”.
• Driving on tires with no or insufficient tread is dangerous. Wornout tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
vehicle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to section
7, “Tires and wheels”.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or Icy conditions
1VQA3005
The more severe weather conditions of
winter result in greater wear and other
problems. To minimize the problems of
winter driving, you should follow these
suggestions:
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Furthermore,
speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden
brake applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽ NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all countries.
Check the country laws before fitting
tire chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against
their use.
5 55
Driving your vehicle
When using tire chains, attach them to
the drive wheels as follows.
2WD : Front wheels
4WD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not available for an 4WD vehicle, chains
may be installed on the front
wheels only.
CAUTION
1VQA3007
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wiretype chains with a thickness of less than
15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.
5 56
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to
0.6 miles) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if available. Always place the vehicle in P
(park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)
or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or lockedwheel braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check battery and cables
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a service station.
5 57
Driving your vehicle
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
5 58
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the vehicle to be sure the
movement of the front wheels and the
steering components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tire chains, tow
straps or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a
window scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING (FOR EUROPE)
If you are considering towing with your
✽ NOTICE - For Europe
vehicle, you should first check with your
country's Department of Motor Vehicles
to determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for towing trailers, cars, or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for further
details before towing.
WARNING - Towing a trailer
If you don't use the correct equipment and/or drive improperly, you
can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, GCW (gross combination weight), GVW (gross vehicle
weight), GAW (gross axle weight )
and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
• The technically permissible maximum
load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 % and
the technically permissible maximum
laden mass of the vehicle may be
exceeded by not more than 10 % or
100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichever value is
lower. In this case, do not exceed 100
km/h (62.1 mph) for vehicle of category M1 or 80 km/h (49.7 mph) for vehicle of category N1.
• When a vehicle of category M1 is towing a trailer, the additional load
imposed at the trailer coupling device
may cause the tire maximum load ratings to be exceeded, but not by more
than 15 %. In this case, do not exceed
100 km/h (62.1 mph) and increase the
tire inflation pressure by at least 0.2
bar.
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
5 59
Driving your vehicle
• Left side
• Right side
5 60
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to
seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a framemounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• A HYUNDAI accessory trailer hitch is
available at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Driving your vehicle
Safety chains
Trailer brakes
Driving with a trailer
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to your
country’s regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the maximum allowed weight without trailer
brakes, then the trailer will also require its
own brakes as well. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Don’t tap into or modify your vehicle's
brake system.
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experienced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
5 61
Driving your vehicle
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
5 62
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring harness.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring harness.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in damage to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45
mph) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle,
you should drive in D (Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not overheat.
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the
dial towards “H” (HOT), pull over
and stop as soon as it is safe to
do so, and allow the engine to idle
until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
5 63
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if unexpectedly roll down hill.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause serious injury or death, should the trailer break loose.
5 64
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the curb (right if headed down hill,
left if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,
place the car in neutral. If the vehicle
has an automatic transaxle, place the
car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the parking brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P
(Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
Driving your vehicle
When you are ready to leave after parking on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neutral
or automatic transaxle in P (Park),
apply your brakes and hold the brake
pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular attention to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driving. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the A/C
and stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with the air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
5 65
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in
order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h (60
mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important considerations that have to do with weight:
5 66
Engine
Gasoline Engine
2.0L
M/T
A/T
2.4L
A/T
M/T
A/T
Without brake
System
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
With brake
System
1900
(4189)
1600
(3527)
1600
(3527)
2000
(4409)
1600
(3527)
80
(176)
80
(176)
80
(176)
80
(176)
80
(176)
Item
Maximum trailer
weight
kg (Ibs.)
Diesel Engine
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling
device
kg (Ibs.)
Recommended distance from
rear wheel center to coupling
point
mm (inch)
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
963
(37.9)
2.0L
Driving your vehicle
The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
permissible trailer tongue load. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
Tongue Load
Total Trailer Weight
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
C190E02JM
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than the maximum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trailer towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
5 67
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, to keep your
loaded vehicle weight within its design
rating capability. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
the vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle's weight ratings, from the
vehicle's specifications and the certification label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
5 68
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s (or
front passenger’s) door sill.
Overloading
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-3
If the engine will not start / 6-4
Emergency starting / 6-5
If the engine overheats / 6-7
If you have a flat tire / 6-8
Towing / 6-16
Emergency commodity / 6-21
What to do in an emergency
6
What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
OLM049084
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
6 2
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle
not equipped with a ignition lock
switch, the vehicle can move forward
by shifting to the 2(second) or 3(third)
gear and then turning the starter without depressing the clutch pedal.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If engine stalls while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the vehicle slow down while
driving straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible
and park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not park
in the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the vehicle that is away from
traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this section.
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
6 3
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position, check all connectors at
ignition, coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage. In addition,
push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter to be overloaded and create a fire hazard.
6 4
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting
Jumper Cables
(-)
(-)
(+)
Discharged battery
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
(+)
CAUTION
Booster battery
1VQA4001
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek
qualified
assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
6 5
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2). Proceed to
connect one end of the other jumper
cable to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other end
to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for
example, the engine lifting bracket)
away from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that moves
when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
6 6
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control system.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle)
or
neutral
(manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from the hood, stop the engine. Do not
open the hood until the coolant has
stopped running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss of
engine coolant and no steam, leave
the engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check
for coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
6 7
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OLM069001
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
6 8
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on firm level ground.
If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a towing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children present are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
OLM069002
1VQA4022
Removing and storing the spare
tire
1. Remove the lock (1, if equipped)
by pulling out the lock.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
(2) counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle
or P (Park) with automatic
transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.
6 9
What to do in an emergency
1VQA4023
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6 10
WARNING - Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OCM049011N
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
What to do in an emergency
OCM049013N
OCM054012
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
6 11
What to do in an emergency
WARNING
Wheels and wheel covers may
have sharp edges. Handle them
carefully to avoid possible
severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that
there is nothing on the hub or
wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,
etc.) that interferes with the
wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fingers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
OXM069007
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench handle.
Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)
6 12
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” in
section 8.
6 13
What to do in an emergency
Important - use of compact spare tire
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
6 14
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at the speed
over 80 km/h (50 mph). The
original tire should be repaired
or replaced as soon as is possible to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough to avoid all hazards. Any
road hazard, such as a pothole or
debris, could seriously damage the
compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the compact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car components may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.
6 15
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
On 4WD vehicles, your vehicle must be
towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off
the ground.
CAUTION
The 4WD vehicle should never be
towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the 4WD
system.
dolly
dolly
OXM069028
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
6 16
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to tow
the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground (without dollies) and the front
wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.
OUN046030
OCM054034
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
■ Front
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.
OLM069013
■ Rear (if equipped)
OLM069016L
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front or
rear bumper.
6 17
What to do in an emergency
■ Front
OLM069014
■ Rear
OLM069015
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
6 18
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speed. Also, the wheels,
axles, power train, steering and brakes
must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the towing hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot
be driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
What to do in an emergency
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for
assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
OXM069009
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
6 19
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1
mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, a
flatbed equipment or towing dolly
must be used.
6 20
OLM069017L
Tie-down hook (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the hooks under the
vehicle for towing purposes. These
hooks are designed. If the tie-down
hooks are used for towing, the tiedown hooks or bumper will be damaged and this could lead to serious
injury.
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency commodities
in the vehicle to help you respond to the
emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know how to
use the fire extinguisher, take the following steps carefully.
1. Pull the pin at the top of the extinguisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle toward the base of the
fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away
from the fire and squeeze the handle
to discharge the extinguisher. If you
release the handle, the discharge will
stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the
base of the fire. After the fire appears
to be out, watch it carefully since it
may re-ignite.
First aid kit
There are some items such as scissors,
bandage and adhesive tape and etc. in
the kit to give first aid to an injured person.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the road to
warn oncoming vehicles during emergencies, such as when the vehicle is
parked by the roadside due to any problems.
Tire pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-today use, and you may have to add a few
pounds of air periodically and it is not
usually a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire pressure increases with temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the following steps;
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is
located on the rim of the tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against the
tire valve. Some air will escape as you
begin and more will escape if you don't
press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will activate
the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to
know whether the tire pressure is low
or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressures to the specified pressure. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
6 21
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-4
Owner maintenance / 7-6
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-21
Engine oil / 7-24
Engine coolant / 7-25
Brake/clutch fluid / 7-28
Power steering fluid / 7-29
Washer fluid / 7-30
Parking brake / 7-30
Fuel filter / 7-31
Air cleaner / 7-32
Climate control air filter / 7-34
Wiper blades / 7-36
Battery / 7-39
Maintenance
Tires and wheels / 7-42
Fuses / 7-52
Light bulbs / 7-62
Appearance care / 7-70
Emission control system / 7-76
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
11. Power steering fluid reservoir*
* : if equipped
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLM079001L
7 2
Maintenance
■ Diesel Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Fuse box
3. Fuel filter
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Negative battery terminal
9. Positive battery terminal
10. Radiator cap
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
12. Power steering fluid reservoir*
* : if equipped
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLM079002L
7 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
perform this work.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine
HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality
service, see an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.
7 4
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high
service quality standards and receives
technical support from HYUNDAI in
order to provide you with a high level of
service satisfaction.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special
tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Service Passport provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
Engine compartment precautions
(Diesel engine)
• The piezo injector operates at high
voltage (maximum 200v). Therefore,
the following accidents may occur.
- Direct contact with the injector or
injector wiring may cause electric
shock or damage your muscle or
nerve system.
- The electromagnetic wave from the
operating injector may cause the artificial heart pacemaker to malfunction.
• Follow the safety tips provided below,
when you are checking the engine
room while the engine is running.
- Do not touch the injector, injector
wirings, and the engine computer
while the engine is running.
- Do not remove the injector connector
while the engine is running.
- People using pacemakers must not
go near the engine while the engine
is starting or running.
WARNING - Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High-pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high-pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room while engine is running, since the high currents in the
electronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
7 5
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
7 6
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hardto-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check manual transaxle operation,
including clutch operation.
• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake (and clutch) fluid
level.
7 7
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, follow Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
7 8
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After the periods or distance shown in
the chart, continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of
service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*6 : Manual transaxle fluid, transfer case oil and rear differential
*1 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged
in water.
*2 : Driving in summer season temperature over 40 °C (104 °F
- SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN,
*7 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration
YEMEN ETC) or driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must
and adjust if necessary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer
conform the severe driving condition.
should perform the operation.
*3 : Inspect and if necessary correct or replace. Inspect drive
*8 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
belt tensioner, idler and alternator, pulley and if necessary
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
correct or replace.
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can
result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*4 : The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
*9 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some imporwhen you do maintenance of other items.
tant matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,
*10 : If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards
hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately
(EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not availregardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorable, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are
ized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*5 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. HYUNDAI recommends "every 7,500km inspection, every 15,000km
replacement". If there are some important safety matters
like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting
problem etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East, India
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East, India
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel)*1
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months) *2
❑ Add fuel additives *10
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 10
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East, India
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *3
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Gasoline) *4
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *5
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline)
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (4WD)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East, India
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *1
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months) *2
❑ Add fuel additives *10
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
7 11
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 36 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *1
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months) *2
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gasoline)
❑ Add fuel additives *10
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 12
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East, India
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24
months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *3
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Gasoline)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *6
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (4WD) (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear differential oil (4WD) *6
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (4WD) *6
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East, India
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *1
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months) *2
❑ Replace fuel filter (Gasoline) *4
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *5
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter (Gasoline)
❑ Add fuel additives *10
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
7 13
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
75,000 km (50,000 miles) or 60 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East, India
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East, India
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *1
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months) *2
❑ Add fuel additives *10
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 14
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24
months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *3
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Gasoline) *4
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *5
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline)
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (4WD) (if equipped)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect valve clearance (Gasoline) *7
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *1
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months) *2
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gasoline)
❑ Add fuel additives *10
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
7 15
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
105,000 km (70,000 miles) or 84 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East, India
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East, India
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *1
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months) *2
❑ Add fuel additives *10
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 16
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 96 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East, India
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24
months)
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *3
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Gasoline)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *6
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect power steering fluid and hoses
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (4WD) (if equipped)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect rear differential oil (4WD) *6
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (4WD) *6
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East, India
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace coolant *8
(At first 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months,
after every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months) *9
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *1
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *1
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months) *2
(Continued)
(Continued)
7 17
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace fuel filter (Gasoline) *4
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *5
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter (Gasoline)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gasoline)
(Every 45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *10
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 18
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - EXCEPT EUROPE
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
Gasoline
Maintenance
operation
Except Middle
East
R
For Middle East
R
Diesel
R
Maintenance intervals
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or
6 months
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
Replace more frequently depending
on the condition
Replace more frequently depending
on the condition
Driving condition
A, B, C, F, G,
H, I, J, K, L
Air cleaner filter
R
Spark plug (Gasoline)
R
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, G, H, I, K
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
R
Every 100,000 km (62,000 miles)
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
Propeller shaft (if equipped)
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
or 12 months
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, E
B, H
C, D, E, F, G
C, E
C, D, E, F, G
7 19
Maintenance
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
Replace more frequently depending
on the condition
Driving condition
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors
I
Parking brake
I
Drive shaft and boots
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
Rear differential oil (4WD)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Transfer case oil (4WD)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, G, I, K, H
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather
above 32 °C (90 °F)
7 20
G
H
I
J
K
L
:
:
:
:
:
:
C, D, E, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
C, E, G
Driving in mountainous areas.
Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack
Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
Driving in very cold weather
Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
any damaged or leaking parts immediately.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING - Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touch the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room while engine is running, since the high currents in the
Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
7 21
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
Coolant
A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is replaced.
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Spark plugs (for gasoline engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
(for gasoline engine)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should
perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts, such as
radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid should
be changed at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer in accordance to the scheduled
maintenance at the beginning of this
chapter.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
7 22
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle
fluid.
(Refer
to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Maintenance
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever (or pedal) and
cables.
Brake pads, calipers and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the
Hyundai web site.
(http://brakemanual.hmc.co.kr)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor (if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage. Replace
any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt (or
drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,
excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary.
7 23
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
CAUTION
OLM079003N
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immediately.
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
7 24
CAUTION - Diesel engine
Overfilling the engine oil may cause
severe dieseling due to churning
effect. It may lead to engine damage
accompanied with abrupt engine
speed increment, combustion noise
and white smoke emission.
OLM079004N
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least once
a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
7 25
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing serious injury.
WARNING
The electric motor (cooling fan) is controlled by
engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off. This is a normal condition.
7 26
OLM079006
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent coolant refill is required, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling
system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.
Ambient
Temperature
-15°C (5°F)
-25°C (-13°F)
-35°C (-31°F)
-45°C (-49°F)
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60
Water
65
60
50
40
Maintenance
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
CAUTION
OLM072007-1
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pressure causing serious injury.
Put a thick cloth or fabric around
the radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
7 27
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLM079008N
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7 28
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly. Don't put in the wrong
kind of fluid. A few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
✽ NOTICE
Check that the fluid level is in the
"HOT" range on the reservoir. If the
fluid is cold, check that it is in the
"COLD" range.
In the event the power steering system
requires frequent addition of fluid, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLM079009L
Checking the power steering fluid
level
With the vehicle on level ground, check
the fluid level in the power steering reservoir periodically. The fluid should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid, thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir cap to prevent power steering fluid
contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level.
Use only the specified power steering
fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants
or capacities" in section 8.)
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks, damage and twists in the power steering
hose before driving.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate the
vehicle for prolonged periods
with a low power steering fluid
level.
• Never start the engine when the
reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the tank.
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort and/or
noise from the power steering
system.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of
the power steering system and
cause damage to it.
7 29
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
WASHER FLUID
WARNING - Coolant
OLM079010
Checking the washer fluid level
1. Open the cover.
2. Pull the gauge out and check the level.
The level should be between H and L.
3. If it is near of at L, add enough washer
fluid to bring the level to H. Do not
overfill.
Plain water may be used if washer fluid is
not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in
cold climates to prevent freezing.
7 30
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting windshield washer fluid.
Serious injury or death could
occur.
OLM059014
Checking the parking brake
Type A
Check whether the stroke is within specification when the parking brake pedal is
depressed with 20 kg (44 lb, 196N) of
force. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 4 notch
Maintenance
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Draining water from fuel filter
OLM059016
Type B
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an
important role of separating water from
fuel and accumulating the water in its
bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter, the
warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light illuminates,
take your car to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have
drain the water and checked
the system.
OLM079011
Fuel filter cartridge replacement
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the fuel
filter is not drained at proper times,
damages to the major parts such as
the fuel system can be caused by
water permeation in the fuel filter.
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the fuel filter cartridge,
use HYUNDAI genuine parts.
Stroke : 6 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
7 31
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
OLM079012N
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
7 32
OLM079013N
OLM079014
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to “Maintenance
under severe usage conditions” in this
section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use
of nongenuine part could damage
the air flow sensor or turbo charger.
7 33
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the severely
air-polluted cities or on dusty rough
roads for a long period, it should be
inspected more frequently and replaced
earlier. When you, the owner, replace the
climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other components.
Replace the filter according to the maintenance Schedule.
OLM079015
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support strap (1).
7 34
OLM079016
2. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides.
Maintenance
OLM079017
OLM079018
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case while pressing the lock on the
right of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it properly. Otherwise, the
system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.
7 35
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
1JBA5122
Blade inspection
✽ NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
7 36
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.
Maintenance
OLM079200
OLM079201
OLM079202
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
7 37
Maintenance
OHM078062
OHM078063
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper
blade.
7 38
Maintenance
BATTERY
WARNING - Battery
(Continued)
dangers
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention
immediately.
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
OLM079019N
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
Pb
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
7 39
Maintenance
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
CAUTION
If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
7 40
■ Example
Battery recharging
OJD072039
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
1. CMF65L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model
name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 2030A for two hours.
Maintenance
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
7 41
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
7 42
CAUTION
OLM089008N
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire underinflation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
WARNING - Tire inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (1
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
7 43
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
7 44
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
S2BLA790
Without a spare tire
WARNING
S2BLA790A
Directional tires (if equipped)
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
CBGQ0707A
7 45
Maintenance
WARNING - Replacing
Tread wear indicator
OEN076053
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
7 46
tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and traction.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) (if equipped) to
work irregularly.
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow
chain
clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
7 47
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
I030B04JM
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
7 48
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P225/55R18 102H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
225 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
102 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX18
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
Maintenance
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This
symbol corresponds to that tire's
designed maximum safe operating
speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
3. Checking tire life
(TIN : Tire Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years, based
on the manufacturing date, tire
strength and performance, decline
with age naturally (even unused
spare tires). Therefore, the tires
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
Warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or
death.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
4. Tire ply composition and material
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1613 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2013.
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
7 49
Maintenance
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
7 50
Tread wear
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by the
law.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.
7 51
Maintenance
FUSES
Blade type
Normal
Blown
Cartridge type
Normal
Blown
Fusible link
Normal
Normal
Blown
Blown
OLM079051N
7 52
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 3 (or 4) fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bolster,
the other in the engine compartment
near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, disconnect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Four kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and fusible link for higher amperage ratings.
WARNING - Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
Maintenance
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.
OLM079020
OLM079021N
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigar lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse block in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
7 53
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
• If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
• Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or other electrical devices.
OLM079022
Memory fuse (SHUNT connector)
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse (SHUNT connector) to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle is parked
without being operated for prolonged
periods. Use the following procedures
before parking the vehicle for prolonged
periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull out the memory fuse (SHUNT
connector).
7 54
OLM079023N
Diesel only
OLM079024
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the tap and pulling up.
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse box cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water leaking in.
OLM079052N
OLM079025
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel on the right
side in the engine compartment.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the multi fuse or main fuse is blown,
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7 55
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay
name and capacity.
Driver’s side panel
Engine compartment
Main fuse
Diesel only
OLM079026/OLM079053N/OLM079027/OLM079028
7 56
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse box on your
vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
Maintenance
Inner fuse panel (Instrument panel)
No.
1
Fuse rating
10A
Symbol
Fuse Name
AUDIO 1
Protected component
2
10A
MODULE 2
IPS Control Module (ON Input), BCM, PDM, Electro Chromic Mirror, Head Lamp
Leveling Device Switch Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH
3
10A
START
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 4 - Start, RLY. 11 - ATM P/N), Burglar Alarm Relay
4
10A
ROOM LP
5
10A
6
10A
CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster (IND.), SBR Switch, Console Switch, BCM, Smart Key Control
Module, Alternator
7
10A
MODULE 4
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 1 - Blower), Diesel Box (RLY. 2 - PTC Heater Relay #2,
RLY. 3 - PTC Heater Relay #3) A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, Sunroof Motor
8
25A
POWER
OUTLET 2
Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet, Rear Power Outlet
9
10A
AUDIO 2
Audio, AMP, Power Outside Mirror Switch, Smart Key Control Module, PDM, BCM
10
10A
AIR BAG
SRS Control Module
11
10A
MODULE 1
Audio
BCM, Instrument Cluster (IND.), A/C Control Module, Data Link Connector, Ignition
Switch Ill. & Door Warning Switch RF Receiver, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, MAP
Lamp, Room Lamp, Driver/Passenger Vanity Lamp Switch Luggage Lamp, Electro
Chromic Mirror
AIR BAG IND. Instrument Cluster (IND.)
IPS Control Module (ON/START Input), ICM Relay Box (DBC Relay), Multifunction
Switch (Light), 4WD ECM Stop Lamp Switch (G4KD/G4KE), Steering Angle Sensor,
ESP Off Switch, DBC Switch
7 57
Maintenance
No.
Fuse rating
12
10A
FOG LP RR
ICM Relay Box (Rear Fog Lamp Relay)
13
25A
WIPER FRT
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 12 - Front Wiper LO), Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction
Switch (Wiper)
14
15A
S/HEATER
FRT
Console Switch
15
15A
POWER
OUTLET 1
Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet
16
10A
17
15A
DR LOCK
18
7.5A
MODULE 5
BCM, Smart Key Control Module, PDM
19
15A
WIPER RR
ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
20
15A
SUNROOF
Sunroo f Motor
21
20A
IGN 1
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (FUSE - F23(ECU 2) / F24(ABS) / F25(TCU 2))
22
7.5A
A/CON
A/C Control Module (Auto)
23
25A
P/WDW RH
7 58
Symbol
Fuse Name
Protected component
Back-Up Lamp Relay, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Combination Lamp (IN)
BACK-UP LP LH/RH
Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center LH/RH
Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay
Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window
Switch RH
Maintenance
No.
24
Fuse rating
10A
Symbol
25
10A
26
10A
SMART KEY
27
15A
PDM
28
25A
P/WDW LH
29
25A
AMP
30
7.5A
HTD MIRR
31
20A
SAFETY
P/WDW
32
7.5A
TPMS
33
15A
HAZARD
POWER CONNECTOR
Fuse Name
MODULE 3
Protected component
Power Outside Mirror Switch
P/SEAT (DRV) Driver Seat Manual Switch
PDM, Smart Key Control Module, Start Stop Button Switch, FOB Holder, Key
Solenoid
PDM
Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window
Switch LH
AMP
Rear Defogger Switch, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
Driver Safety Power Window Module
4WD ECM, ATM Shift Lever, Rear Parking Assist Buzzer
ICM Relay Box (Flasher Sound Relay), BCM
FUSE - (AUDIO 1) / (ROOM LP)
7 59
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
No.
MULTI
FUSE
Fuse rating
Fuse Name
Protected component
I/P Junction Box (Fuse - F13 / F20 / F31 / F37, IPS Control Module - IPS 4 /
IPS 5 / IPS 6 / IPS 7)
1
60A
B+1
2
40A
ABS 2
3
40A
EMS
4
40A
ABS 1
5
40A
BLOWER
6
60A
B+3
I/P Junction Box (Fuse - F29 / F30 / F35 / F36, Power Connector - F1 / F4)
7
60A
B+2
I/P Junction Box (Power Window Relay, Fuse - F23 / F28 / F33, IPS Control
Module - IPS 0 / IPS 1 / IPS 2 / IPS 3)
8
40A (50A)
GSL (DSL)
COOLING
FAN
RLY. 3 (Cooling Fan Low Relay), RLY. 9 (Cooling Fan High Relay)
9
40A
HEATED
GLASS RR
RLY. 6 (Rear Defogger Relay)
10
30A
IGN 1
W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - PDM Relay Box (IGN1
Relay)
11
40A
IGN 2
RLY. 4 (Start Relay), W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - PDM
Relay Box (IGN1 Relay)
FUSE
7 60
Symbol
ESP Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
EMS Box (Fuse - F1 / F2 / F3 / F6)
ESP Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
RLY. 1 (Blower Relay)
Maintenance
No.
FUSE
Fuse rating
Symbol
Fuse Name
Protected component
12
15A
HORN
RLY. 2 (Horn Relay), RLY. 5 (Burglar Alarm Relay)
13
15A
DEICER
14
10A
15
7.5A
ECU 2
RLY. 11 (ATM P/N Relay), G4KD/G4KE - PCM, Multipurpose Check Connector,
D4HA - ECM, Mass Air Flow Sensor
16
7.5A
ABS
ESP Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector,
Fuel Filter Warning Sensor (D4HA) Glow Relay Unit (D4HA), Diesel Box (RLY.
4 - Fuel Filter Heater Relay)
17
7.5A
TCU 2
RLY. 6 (Rear Defogger Relay), RLY. 10 (Front Wiper Deicer Relay)
STOP LAMP Stop Lamp Switch, ICM Relay Box (DBC Relay)
Transaxle Range Switch, TCM (D4HA), Vehicle Speed Sensor
Engine compartment sub fuse panel (Diesel Engine)
No.
Fuse rating
1
50A
Fuse Symbol
PTC Heater Relay #1 (MICRO PLUG)
Circuit Protected
Relay Symbol
MICRO PLUG
2
50A
PTC Heater Relay #2 (MICRO PLUG)
MICRO PLUG
3
50A
PTC Heater Relay #3 (MICRO PLUG)
MICRO PLUG
4
30A
Fuel Filter Heater Relay (MICRO PLUG)
MICRO PLUG
5
80A
Glow Relay Unit
-
Relay Type
-
7 61
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position and turn off
the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
7 62
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. In many cases, it is difficult
to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle
must be removed before you can
get to the bulb. This is especially
true if you have to remove the headlight assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
OLM079029
Headlight, position light, turn signal light, front fog light bulb
replacement
(1) Front turn signal light
(2) Position light
(3) Headlight (High/Low)
(4) Front fog light (if equipped)
OLM079030
Headlight
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socketconnector.
4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and pushing it upward.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap
the headlight bulb retaining wire into
position by aligning the wire with the
groove on the bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socketconnector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
✽ NOTICE
If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
7 63
Maintenance
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OHD076046
WARNING - Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
(Continued)
7 64
OLM079046
Turn signal light/Position light
Turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine and open the hood.
2. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
Maintenance
5. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
Position light
1. Turn off the engine and open the hood.
2. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
5. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
6. Connect the power connector to the
socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover.
OLM079031
Side repeater light bulb replacement (if equipped)
Type A
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
7 65
Maintenance
OLM079034
OLM079033
OLM079050
Type B
1. Remove the light assembly from the
vehicle by prying the lens and pulling
the assembly out.
2. Reinstall a new light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
OLM079035
Outside light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
7 66
Maintenance
OLM079047
OLM079036
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
OLM079038
Inside light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover using a flatblade screwdriver.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
7 67
Maintenance
Rear Fog Light (if equipped)
1. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
3. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
4. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
7 68
OLM079039
OLM079055
High mounted stop light bulb
replacement (if equipped)
License plate light bulb replacement
If the light does not operate, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1. Remove the lens by pressing the tabs.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket and
install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.
Maintenance
Map lamp
Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
WARNING
Sunvisor lamp
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” button is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
Room lamp
OLM079040/OXM079041/OLM079042/OLM079044/
OLM079045
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
7 69
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
7 70
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each offroad trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
Maintenance
OJB037800
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure
water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
7 71
Maintenance
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
7 72
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
Maintenance
Aluminum or chrome wheel maintenance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum or chrome
wheels. They may scratch or damage
the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum or chrome wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:
7 73
Maintenance
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
7 74
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for the
proper way to clean vinyl.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to
come
in
contact
with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
CAUTION
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fireresistant properties.
7 75
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Service Passport
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all emission
regulations.
There are three emission control systems which are as follows.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Program (ESP) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) system off by pressing the ESP switch.
• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESP system back on
by pressing the ESP switch again.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
1. Crankcase emission control
system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manual.
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase. This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
7 76
2. Evaporative emission control
System
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warmsup during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
Maintenance
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electronic
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions following to
avoid CO poisoning.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
7 77
Maintenance
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehicle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off.
Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get
burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
7 78
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engine.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system removes the soot emitted from the
vehicle.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes)
and removes the accumulated soot
according to the driving condition. In
other words, the active burning by engine
control system and high exhaust gas
temperature caused by normal/high driving condition burns and removes the
accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to be
driven at low speed for long time, the
accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust
gas temperature. In this particular case,
the amount of soot is out of detection
limit, the soot oxidation process by
engine control system may not happen
and the malfunction indicator light may
blink.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the
vehicle at more than 60km/h (37 mph) or
at more than second gear with 1500 ~
2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
Maintenance
If the malfunction indicator light continues to be blinked in spite of the procedure, please visit an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and then check the
DPF system.
If you continue to drive with the malfunction indicator light blinking for a long
time, the DPF system can be damaged
and fuel consumption can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.
7 79
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-2
Tires and wheels / 8-3
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-7
Vehicle certification label / 8-7
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-8
Engine number / 8-8
Air conditioner compressor label / 8-8
Declaration of conformity / 8-9
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications & Consumer information
DIMENSIONS
BULB WATTAGE
Item
mm (in)
Overall length
4410 (173.6)
Overall width
1820 (71.6)
Overall height
1655 (65.2)/1685 (66.3)*
Front tread
1585 (62.4)
Rear tread
1586 (62.4)
Wheelbase
2640 (103.9)
* with roof rack
Light Bulb
Headlights (Low/High)
Front turn signal lights
Position lights
Side repeater lights (Outside mirror)*
Side repeater lights*
Front fog lights*
Rear fog light*
Stop and tail lights (Outside)
Rear turn signal lights (Outside)
Tail light* (Inside)
Back-up lights (Inside)
High mounted stop light*
License plate lights
Map lamps
Room lamps
Luggage lamp*
Glove box lamp*
Vanity mirror lamps*
* If equipped
8 2
Wattage
55/60
21
5
LED
5
27
21
21/5
21
5
16
LED
5
10
10
5
5
5
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
Inflation pressure
Item
Full size tire
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
Tire
size
bar (psi, kPa)
Wheel size
225/55R18
6.5J×18
225/60R17
6.5J×17
T155/90D16
4.0T×16
Normal load
(
)
Maximum load
(
)
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
(33, 230) (33, 230)
(33, 230)
(33, 230)
9~11
4.2
4.2
(60, 420) (60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
(65~79, 88~107)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
8 3
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Engine oil
*1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Gasoline
Engine
Diesel Engine
Engine oil consumption
Manual transaxle fluid
Volume
Classification
2.0 L
2.4 L
4.1 l (4.33 US qt.)
4.6 l (4.86 US qt.)
API Service SM*3,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
with DPF *4
8.0 l (8.45 US qt.)
ACEA C3
8.0 l (8.45 US qt.)
ACEA B4
MAX. 1 l /1500 km
MAX. 1 l /1000 km
-
without DPF *
4
Normal driving condition
Severe driving condition
Gasoline
Engine
2.0 L
2.1~2.2 l
(2.22~2.32 US qt.)
2.4 L
1.8~1.9 l
(1.90~2.01 US qt.)
Diesel Engine
1.8~1.9 l
(1.90~2.01 US qt.)
Gasoline Engine
7.1 l (7.50 US qt.)
Automatic transaxle fluid
Diesel Engine
Power steering (if equipped)
7.8 l (8.24 US qt.)
1.0 l (1.06 US qt.)
API GL-4, SAE 75W/85
MICHANG ATF SP-IV
SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV
HYUNDAI genuine ATF & SP-IV
PSF-3
* Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on 8-6 page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
*4 Diesel Particulate Filter
1
8 4
Specifications & Consumer information
Lubricant
Coolant
Gasoline Engine
Diesel Engine
Volume
Classification
6.7 l (7.08 US qt.)
8.5 l (8.98 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~08 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
0.65 l ( 0.69 US qt.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Transfer case oil (4WD)
0.6 l (0.63 US qt.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Fuel
55 l (14.5 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
Brake/clutch fluid
Rear differential oil (4WD)
8 5
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.
Temperature
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
50
120
20W-50
15W-40
Gasoline
Engine Oil *1
10W-30
5W-20 *2, 5W-30
15W-40
10W-30
Diesel
Engine Oil
5W-30
0W-30/40
*1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-20*2 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country,
select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*2 : In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
8 6
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
Frame number
Type A
VIN label (if equipped)
OLM089002N
OLM089001
OLM089006N
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to
its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check the
number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
Type B
OLM089009L
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).
8 7
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
■ Gasoline engine
OLM089003
OLM089008N
■ Diesel engine
ODW081001
A compressor label informs you the type
of compressor your vehicle is equipped
with such as model, supplier part number, production number, refrigerant (1)
and refrigerant oil (2).
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
OLM089004
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
8 8
Specifications & Consumer information
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
■ Example
CE0678
The radio frequency components of the
vehicle comply with requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive
1995/5/EC.
Further information including the manufacturer's declaration of conformity is
available on HYUNDAI web site as follows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
8 9
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement